Key Benefits:
REGULATION
MINISTER OF INFRASTRUCTURE 1)
of 12 April 2002
on the technical conditions to which the buildings should correspond and their location
On the basis of art. 7 ust. 2 point 1 of the Act of 7 July 1994. -Building law (Dz. U. of 2013 r. items 1409, with late. (d) the following shall be managed:
SECTION I
General provisions
§ 1. [ Regulatory scope] The Regulation lays down the technical conditions to which the buildings and related equipment should correspond, their location on the building site and the installation of the plots to be built, ensuring that the requirements of the art are met. 5 and 6 of the Act of 7 July 1994. -Building law.
§ 2. [ Application of the Regulation] 1. The provisions of the Regulation shall apply in the design, construction and reconstruction of buildings and on the use of buildings and buildings that meet the utility functions of the buildings, as well as to the associated facilities. of construction, subject to § 207 ust. 2.
2. Under the superstructure, expansion, rebuilding and altering of the use of:
1) buildings with usable area not exceeding 1000 m 2 ,
2. buildings with a usable area exceeding 1000 m 2 Referred to in art. 5 paragraph 7 points 1 to 4 and 6 [ 1] the Act of 7 July 1994. -Building law
-the requirements referred to in paragraph 1 may be met in a manner other than that laid down in the Regulation, in accordance with the indications of the technical expertise of the relevant research and development unit or of the construction and security experts. fire fighting, agreed with the appropriate commandant of the State Fire Service or the state provincial health inspectorate, according to the subject of the expert report.
3. (repealed).
3a. In overbuilding, rebuilding, rebuilding and altering the use of existing buildings with usable floor space exceeding 1000 m 2 the requirements referred to in paragraph 1, with the exception of energy performance requirements, may be met in a manner other than that laid down in the Regulation, in accordance with the indications referred to in paragraph 1. 2, agreed with the appropriate Commander of the State State Fire Service or the state provincial health inspectorate, according to the subject matter of this expert.
4. For buildings and sites entered in the register of monuments or areas covered by conservation protection on the basis of the findings of the local spatial plan of the expert study referred to in paragraph. 2, it is also subject to reconciliation with the voivodship conservator of monuments.
5. The provisions of the regulation relating to a building with a specific purpose shall also apply to any part of the building of that purpose.
6. For multi-family buildings containing two dwellings shall be applied, subject to § 217 par. 1 point 1 lit. a and point 2, the provisions of the Regulation relating to single-family buildings.
§ 3. [ Definitions] Whenever there is a regulation in the regulation:
1) urban development-this must be understood by the grouping of intensive buildings in the functional area of the downtown area, which is either factual or envisaged in the local spatial development plan of the city centre or city district;
2) one family structure-one must understand one family building or a team of such buildings, together with garage and farm buildings;
3. the construction of the farm-the housing, farm or livestock buildings in the family farm, breeding or horticulture, and in forest farms, shall be understood by this;
4) residential building-this should be understood by:
(a) a multi-family residential building,
(b) a single-family residential building;
5) building of collective residence-this should be understood by the building intended for the periodic stay of the people, in particular the hotel, motel, guest house, holiday house, excursion house, youth hostel, hostel, internships, student house, building The barracks, the accommodation facility on the premises of the penal facility, the detention facility, the correctional facility, the juvenile refuge, as well as the building for the permanent residence of the people, in particular the child's home, the home of the rencists and the religious house;
6) building of public utility-this is understood by the building intended for public administration, justice, culture, religious worship, education, higher education, science, education, health care, social or social, banking, trade, gastronomy, services, including postal or telecommunications services, tourism, sport, passenger services in rail, road, air, sea or inland waterway, and other building to perform similar functions; for a public utility building An office or social building is also recognised;
7) individual recreation building-this is meant by the building intended for periodic rest;
8) economic building-this is understood by the building intended for the reliable execution of workshop work and for the storage of materials, tools, equipment and agricultural foetuses serving the residents of the residential building, the residence building collective, the building of individual recreation as well as their surroundings, and in the build-up of the farm, intended also for the storage of agricultural inputs and equipment and agricultural crops;
(9) the apartment, which is to be understood as an assembly of accommodation and auxiliary spaces, which has a separate entrance, separated by fixed construction divisions, which allows the permanent residence of the people and the holding of a self-driving household;
10) the living room-it is necessary to understand the rooms in the apartment, as well as the bedrooms and rooms for the daily stay of the people in the collective residence building;
11) auxiliary room-it is necessary to understand the room within the apartment or in the useful room for internal communication, sanitary and sanitary facilities, preparation of meals, except for kitchen facilities mass caterers, as well as the storage of clothing, objects and food;
12) technical room-this shall be understood by the room intended for the equipment used for the operation and maintenance of the building;
(13) the economic room-shall be understood by the space outside the dwelling or the commercial premises used for the storage of objects or food products of the occupants of the building, materials or equipment connected with the maintenance of the building, as well as the fuel or solid waste;
(14) the premises used, shall be understood by one room or unit of premises, separated by fixed construction divisions, which are not a dwelling, a technical room or an economic space;
15) level of the land-shall be understood by that in the project of the land in a given place of the building plot;
16) floor-this is understood by the horizontal hope or underground part of the building between the floor space on the ceiling or the highest floor layer on the ground and the surface of the floor on the ceiling or the weakening layer. heat insulation of a ceiling situated above that part of the building, and the floor is also considered to be attic with rooms intended for the stay of the people and the horizontal part of the building constituting the space on the technical equipment, having an average height in the light of more than 2 m; superstructures are not considered to be storekeeed a roof, such as a crane machinery, ventilation, air conditioning or boiler room;
(17) Underground floor-shall be understood by this condition to the depth of all sides of the building, at least half of its height in the light below the level of the adjacent area, as well as any storey located under it;
18) the floor of the filling-shall be understood by this means any condition which is not the underfloor of the underground;
19) mezzanine-this is understood to mean the upper part of the floor or the room above the intermediate ceiling with an area of less than that of the floor or the space, not closed by construction divisions, the page of the interior from which it is separated;
20) basement-this is understood to mean the floor of a building or a part of it containing a room where the floor level of a part or a whole is below the level of the designed or decorated area, but at least one wall per wall with the windows the floor level is not more than 0,9 m below the level of the land adjacent to that side of the building;
21) the basement-this is to be understood by the condition of the underground or the lowest hope or their part, in which the floor level of at least one side of the building is below the level of the terrain;
22. biologically active site-this shall be understood by the area with a ground surface arranged in such a way as to ensure natural vegetation, as well as 50% of the surface of terraces and stropods with such surface, but not less than 10 m 2 , and surface water in the area;
23) of the building's internal surface-shall be understood by the sum of the surface of all floors of the building, measured after the internal ripple of the external partitions of the building at the level of the floor, without scaling the horizontal section of the building constructions and internal divisions, if they occur on these floors, and also with an increase of the surface of the mezzanine;
24) gross cubature of the building-shall be understood by the sum of the gross cubature of all floors, which is the product of the total area measured on the external rib of the external partition and the height of the gross floor, or between the floor of the building a ceiling or a levelling layer on the ground and the upper surface of the floor or a layer of heat insulation of the ceiling above the highest floor, with the gross cubature of the building:
(a) includes the passage, the crossings and the gate crossings, the attic and the covered parts of the exterior of the building, such as: loggias, hoggles, ganies, cranes, veranda, as well as the cubature of balconies and terraces, calculated to the height of balustrades,
(b) the cubature of the benches and of the foundation feet, the channels and the installation wells, the wells at the windows of the pivots, the external stairs, the ramps and the slipways, the gyms, the pits and the shields and the chimneys and the attic above the plane of the roof are not included.
§ 4. [ Types of Rooms] The premises intended for the stay of the people shall be divided into:
1) premises for permanent residence of people in which the presence of the same persons within a period of time lasts for more than 4 hours;
2) the premises intended for the temporary stay of people in which the residence of the same persons within a day lasts from 2 to 4 hours inclusive.
§ 5. [ The premises intended for the stay of the people] 1. It shall not be considered as intended for the stay of the people of the premises, in which:
1) the total time spent by the same persons is less than 2 hours per day, and the activities carried out are of a casual nature, or the work consists in the short stay connected with the supervision and the maintenance of machinery and equipment or maintenance purity and order;
(2) technological processes are taking place not to ensure the conditions for the residence of the persons in service, without the application of individual personal protective equipment and the behaviour of the special regime of the organisation of work;
3) plant or animal husbandry is carried out, irrespective of the time of the presence of the persons involved in the service.
2. Paragraph Recipe 1 shall be without prejudice to the provisions on safety and health at work.
§ 6. [ Building height] The height of the building, which is used to assign to this building the relevant requirements of the Regulation, is measured from the level of the site at the lowest entrance to the building or part of it, located on the first floor of the building, to the building the upper surface of the highest ceiling, including the thickness of the thermal insulation and the weakening layer, without taking into account the machinery of the cranes and other technical rooms, above this plane, or to the highest point at which it is situated stropodachu or a building block of a building located directly above the premises intended for the stay of the people.
§ 7. (repealed).
§ 8. [ Building height groups] In order to determine the technical and utility requirements, the following breakdown of buildings into groups of heights shall be inserted:
1) low (N)-up to 12 m above ground or residential level up to 4 floors inclusive;
2. diameter (SW)-more than 12 m to 25 m, including land or residential level, more than 4 to 9 inclusive storeys, inclusive;
3) high (W)-more than 25 m to 55 m including land or residential levels of more than 9 to 18 floors inclusive;
4) high-wall (WW)-above 55 m above the ground level.
§ 9. [ Dimensions in light] 1. The dimensions required in the Regulation shall be understood as having taken into account the surface finish of the building elements, and as regards the width of the door-as the dimensions in the light of the frames.
2. The thickness of the door wing after opening shall not reduce the dimension of the width of the opening in the light of the frames.
3. The regulations specified in the regulation of the distance of buildings from other buildings, construction equipment or the boundary of the construction plot shall be measured at the level at the place of their smallest remoteness.
4. For existing buildings, the distance referred to in paragraph is permitted. 3, without taking into account the thickness of the layers of thermal insulation, plaster or exterior lining, this does not apply to the wall of the building located directly at the border of the plot.
5. The list of Polish Standards set up in the Regulation sets out Annex No. 1 to the Regulation.
SECTION II
Construction and development of a building plot
Chapter 1
Location of the building
§ 10. (repealed).
§ 11. [ Building with rooms earmarked for people's stay] 1. The building with the premises earmarked for the stay of the people should be erected beyond the reach of the hazards and nuisances specified in the separate regulations, with the addences of the erection of buildings in this scope provided the means of application technical reducing nuisances below the level fixed by those provisions, or increasing the resistance of the building to these risks and nuisances, if this is not contrary to the conditions laid down for the areas of limited use, specified in the separate provisions.
2. To the nuisance referred to in paragraph. 1, shall include in particular:
1) harmful radiation and the influence of electromagnetic fields;
2) noise and vibrations (vibration);
3) air pollution;
4) pollution of land and water;
5) floods and flooding of rain water;
6) landslides, rock avalanches and snow avalanches;
7) damage caused by mining activities.
§ 12. [ Distance between buildings] 1. If, from the provisions of § 13, 60 and 271-273 or the separate provisions determining the permissible distances of certain structures from the buildings do not result in other requirements, the building on the construction site should be located at a distance from the border with the adjacent plot construction of not less than:
1) 4 m-in the case of a building returned with a wall with window openings or door opening towards that border;
2) 3 m-in the case of a building returned with a wall without window or door openings towards this border.
2. The situation of the building in the case referred to in the paragraph. 1 point 2, a distance of 1,5 m from the border or directly at that border shall be permitted if this is due to the findings of a local plan or a decision on the conditions for the construction and development of the site.
3. In the construction of a single family, having regard to the separate provisions and contained in § 13, 60 and 271-273, it is permitted to:
1) situating a building wall without window or door openings directly at the border with a neighbouring building site or at a distance less than that specified in the paragraph. 1 point 2, but not less than 1,5 m, on a construction site of less than 16 m width;
2) situating the building directly at the border with the adjacent building plot, if it will adhere to the entire surface of its wall to the wall of the building existing on the adjacent plot or to the wall of the design building for which it exists the final decision on the construction permit, provided that the part of the parcel which is 3 m wide along the border of the parcel will have a length and a height not greater than that of the building that exists or is designed on a neighbouring building site;
3) the extension of an existing building situated at a distance less than that specified in the paragraph. 1 from the border with a neighbouring construction site, if its existing dimensions are preserved in a 3 m wide lane along this border, as well as the overbuilding of such a situated building with no more than one storey, with a wall being built, Located at a distance of less than 4 m from the border there must be no window or door opening;
4) the situation of an economic building and a garage with a length of less than 5,5 m and a height of less than 3 m directly at the border with a neighbouring building site or at a distance of not less than 1,5 m wall without window or door openings.
4. Situations of a building on a building plot in the manner referred to in the paragraph. 2 and 3, it shall cover the adjacent building plot with an area of influence within the meaning of Article 3 (2). 3 pt. 20 of the Act of 7 July 1994. -Building law.
5. The distance from the border with the adjacent building plot shall not be less than:
1) 1.5 m to the window, gzymsu, balcony or daszku over the entrance, as well as to such parts of the building as a gallery, terrace, external stairs, slipway or rampant;
2) 4 m to the entrance facing the border of a window located in the roof or roof.
6. The livestock building or the economic building, having regard to the separate provisions and contained in § 13, 60 and 271-273, shall not be placed in a wall with window or door apertures at a distance of less than 8 m from the wall existing in the adjacent plot construction of a residential building, a collective residence building or a public utility building, or one for which there is a final decision on the construction permit, subject to the paragraph. 3 point 4.
7. The distance from the border with the adjacent building plot to the underground part of the building, as well as an underground structure fulfilling the functional functions of the building, located completely below the level of the surrounding area, shall not be established.
§ 13. [ Building distance from other facilities] 1. The distance of a building with spaces dedicated to the stay of people from other facilities shall enable natural lighting of those premises-which is deemed to be fulfilled if:
1) between the arms of the angle of 60 °, which is fixed in a horizontal plane, with the apex situated in the inner face of the wall on the axis of the window of the overridden room, there is no overriding part of the same building or other overriding object in the a distance less than:
(a) the transfer height-for overriding objects up to 35 m,
b) 35 m-for overriding objects of more than 35 m;
2) the requirements referred to in paragraphs 57 and 60 have been respected.
2. The amount of the transfer referred to in paragraph 2. 1 point 1 is measured from the bottom edge of the bottom of the bottom of the building windows to be sent to the level of the highest shading edge of the overriding object or its overriding part.
3. An overriding object may be placed at a distance of not less than 10 m from the window of the transfer room, such as a mast, a chimney, a tower or other building object, without limitation of its height, but of a shading width not more than 3 m, measuring it parallel to the plane of the window.
4. The distances referred to in paragraph. 1 point 1 may be reduced by no more than half of the city's intraurban development.
Chapter 2
Dosages and commutions
§ 14. [ Arrival and commute to buildings] 1. For construction parcels and for buildings and facilities associated with them, access to the public road, suitable for the purpose and use of the buildings and the requirements for fire protection, shall be provided for access to the public road, specified in the separate provisions. The width of the carriageway shall not be less than 3 m.
2. The application of the access to the parcels of the construction parcels in the form of a hastily-carriageway, provided that it has a width of not less than 5 m, permitting the pedestrian movement and the movement and movement of vehicles, shall be allowed.
3. For the building and equipment connected with it, which require commuting, this function may fulfil the requirements, provided that their width is not less than 4,5 m.
4. Advent and commute to buildings, except for one-family, homestead and individual recreation, should have electrical lighting installed, ensuring safe use after dark.
§ 15. [ Outlets for the movement of commercial vehicles] 1. The width, radius of the commute arches, the inclination of the oblong and the transverse and the carrying capacity of the surface should be adjusted to the dimensions of the dimensions, the total weight and the conditions of the movement of vehicles, whose directions to the building plot and the building is necessary with their use, in accordance with the conditions laid down in the separate provisions.
2. At the same time, the arrival at the same time of the movement of the commercial vehicles and of the favoured vehicles up to 2,5 tonnes shall have a bearing on the load bearing capacity at least adjusted to the weight of the vehicles.
§ 16. [ Entrance to the entrance to the building] 1. To enter a multi-family residential building, collective residence and public utility should be brought from the reach and commutation referred to in § 14 paragraph. 1 and 3, hardened to reach a minimum width of 1,5 m, at least one milking shall provide for disabled persons access to the whole building or the parts thereof from which they may benefit.
2. Requirement for the accessibility of persons with disabilities referred to in paragraph 2. 1, does not apply to buildings in closed areas, as well as buildings in detention facilities, arrests of investigators, correctional facilities and shelters for minors and buildings in workplaces, which are not sheltered, except for buildings, which is referred to in § 3 point 6.
§ 17. (repealed).
Chapter 3
Parking spaces for passenger cars
§ 18. [ Parking Spaces for Car Users] 1. Fitting the building site shall be provided, according to its intended purpose and manner of construction, parking spaces for cars of fixed and periodically stationary users, including parking spaces for cars, of which use disabled persons.
2. The number and manner of parking facilities shall be adapted to the requirements laid down in the decision on the conditions for the construction and development of the site, taking into account the number of places to be used by the disabled persons.
§ 19. [ Distance Behavior] 1. Distance of separated parking spaces, including also covered, or open multi-level garage for passenger cars from the windows of rooms dedicated to the permanent residence of people in a residential building, a collective residence building, with The exception of the hotel, the health care building, the education and education building, as well as the playground and the playground for children and young people, shall not be less than:
1) 7 m in case of up to 4 posts inclusive;
2) 10 m in case of 5 to 60 posts inclusive;
3) 20 m-in the case of more posts, having regard to § 276 (1) (a) of the 1.
2. The distance of the separated parking spaces or the open multi-level garage for passenger cars from the border of a construction plot shall not be less than:
1) 3 m in case of up to 4 posts inclusive;
2) 6 m in case of 5 to 60 posts inclusive;
3) 16 m-in case of more positions.
3. The distances referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, apply to the situation of entry into the closed garage in relation to the windows of the health care building, education and upbringing, as well as playgrounds and fields for children and youth.
4. The behaviour of the distances referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, it is not necessary for the situation of parking spaces between the lines demarcating the street.
§ 20. [ Appropriate marking of parking spaces] Parking spaces for cars used exclusively by disabled persons can be located at a distance of not less than 5 m from the windows of a multi-family residential building and a collective residence and close without any restrictions to the other buildings. These sites need to be labelled accordingly.
§ 21. [ Parking posts] 1. Parking spaces for passenger cars should be at least width of 2,3 m and length of 5 m, where for cars operated by persons with disabilities the width of the station should be at least 3.6 m and length of 5 m, and in the case of location along the carriageway-a length of at least 6 m and a width of at least 3,6 m, with the possibility of limiting it to 2.3 m in case of providing the possibility of using the adjoining outlet or the rushed-carriageway.
2. Parking and manoeuvring stations for passenger cars shall have a hardened or at least a stabilised surface, with a drop in water supply.
3. Stations intended for washing and reliable overhaul of cars in parking spaces should have water supply and hard pavement, with decks providing water supply for sewage systems with mud settlers and oil brightists.
Chapter 4
Solid waste collection sites
§ 22. [ Seats on containers] 1. On construction sites, provision should be made for containers for the temporary collection of solid waste, taking into account the possibility of their segregation.
2. The locals referred to in paragraph. 1, may be:
1. covered guards or spaces with or with full or perforated walls;
2) isolated premises in the building, having an ambush above the level of the road surface of the transport agent receiving the waste, but not higher than 0,15 m, including the lower chamber of the system with direct exit from the outside, stocked with the roof of an exposition of at least 1 m and extended to the sides after at least 0,8 m, having walls and washable floors, water melting point, sewage crater, gravitational ventilation and artificial lighting;
3) hardened place to set containers with closed boating holes.
3. Between the entrants to the premises or squares referred to in paragraph. 2, and the driving place of the waste dump trucks should be a hardened milking, enabling the container to be relocated on its own wheels or in trolleys.
4. Locations for the collection of solid waste at multi-family buildings should be accessible to persons with disabilities.
§ 23. [ Distance] 1. Distance of seats on containers and containers for solid waste referred to in § 22 paragraph. 2 points 1 and 3, shall be at least 10 m from windows and doors to buildings with premises intended for the stay of the people and at least 3 m from the border with the adjacent parcel. The maintenance of the distance from the boundary of the parcel is not required if the shields or spaces are in contact with similar devices in the adjacent plot.
2. In the case of the redevelopment of existing buildings, the distances referred to in paragraph. 1, may be reduced, however, no more than halved, after obtaining the opinion of the state provincial health inspector.
3. In the construction of a single family, at risk and individual recreation, a reduction of the distances specified in the paragraph shall be allowed. 1 from windows and doors to 3 m, from the border of the plot to 2 m, as well as the situation of covered guards or spaces on the border of the parcels, if they contact similar devices on a neighbouring plot or at a line demarcating from the side of the street.
4. Distance of seats on containers and containers for solid waste referred to in § 22 paragraph. 2 points 1 and 3, should not be more than 80 m from the furthest entrance to a supported multi-family residential building, collective residence and public utility. This requirement does not apply to buildings in closed areas.
§ 24. [ Tanks for solid waste] 1. In non-urbanised areas the use of solid waste tanks, adapted for periodic emptying, shall be permitted provided that they are situated in the distances specified in § 23 (1). 1.
2. The tanks referred to in paragraph. 1, should have impermeable walls and bottom, tightly covered with a closed inlet opening and a closed side hole for waste disposal. The reservoirs must be brought to a hardened transport.
§ 25. [ Positioning of the visceral flyby] In the case of the multiple-family buildings, the flare should be placed at the disposal sites of the solid waste, with a distance of not less than 10 m from the windows and doors to the premises intended for the stay of the people.
Chapter 5
Technical armaments of the parcel and the drains of surface waters
§ 26. [ Ensuring the possibility of attachment of an armed plot] 1. The building plot, provided for the construction of buildings dedicated to the stay of the people, should be provided with the possibility of attachment of the plot of the plot or directly building to the water supply, sewage system, power station and heating.
2. As equivalent to the connection to the electricity and district heating network, it is considered to provide for the possibility of using individual sources of electricity and heat corresponding to the separate provisions concerning the energy economy and environmental protection.
3. In the absence of conditions for the connection of the water supply and sewage network, the parcel referred to in the paragraph. 1, may be used for the construction of buildings dedicated to the stay of the people, provided that the possibility of using an individual shot of water, as well as the use of a non-outflow tank or a domestic sewage treatment plant, should be used if their quantity not exceeding 5 m 3 daily. If the amount of sewage is greater than 5 m 3 , it is their collection or purification that requires a positive opinion of the environmentally responsible environmental inspector.
4. On construction sites dedicated to hospitals and sanatoriums, regardless of power from the network, it is necessary to provide additionally their own water intake and their own source of electricity and heat.
5. The fulfilment of the conditions set out in the paragraph. 1 and 2 is not required for plots intended for the construction of individual recreation buildings and livestock and farm buildings in the countryside, if the competent authority in the decision on the conditions for construction and management of the site has not specified such land requirements.
§ 27. [ Providing the opportunity to draw or supply water] The use of an individual construction site may be used for the construction or recreation of an individual building, which cannot be supplied with water intended for human consumption from the network or from its own account, provided that the possibility of drawing up or the supply of water from the shots located outside the parcel.
§ 28. [ Sewerage] 1. The building plot at which the buildings are located shall be equipped with sewage system enabling the drainage of rainwater to the rainwater sewage system or the general amphibious.
2. In the absence of possibility of connection to a rainwater sewage system or a general amphibious sewage system, the discharge of rainwater on its own unhardened area, to the lymph pits or to the retention reservoirs is permitted.
§ 29. [ Prohibition of natural changes in rainfall water] Making a change of natural rainfall of rainwater in order to drive them into the territory of the neighboring property is prohibited.
§ 30. [ Placement of water shots] The location on the construction site of water shots, wastewater collection and treatment facilities and solid waste should comply with the requirements of the Regulation and the provisions on the protection of land, water and air.
Chapter 6
Wells
§ 31. [ Location of wells] 1. The distance of the well providing water intended for human consumption, which does not require, in accordance with the provisions on protection of water shots and sources, the establishment of a protection zone, shall be-counting from the axis of the well-at least:
1) to the border of the plot-5 m;
2) to the axis of the roadside ditch-7,5 m;
3) for livestock buildings and associated slit silos, tanks for the accumulation of impurities, compost and similar leak-proof devices-15 m;
4. to the nearest ducting cable to the nearest individual, if the sewage is discharged into biological treatment, to the extent specified in the water protection regulations-30 m;
5) for non-hardened treatments for breeding animals, the nearest ducting wire of the local sewage system without the biological equipment of waste water treatment and to the limit of the filtration field-70 m.
2. The situation of wells shall be allowed at a distance of less than 5 m from the border of the parcel, as well as a common well on the border of two plots, provided that the distance referred to in paragraph is preserved on both plots of land. 1 points 2 to 5.
§ 32. [ Studnia kopana] 1. The construction of a well-digging well providing water intended for human consumption should be made of impermeable materials and not affecting the quality of the water, and the connectors of the housing elements should be duly sealed. With the use of concrete coils, the tightness condition shall be considered to be satisfied if they are made from the inside at the entire height of the well and from the outside to a depth of at least 1,5 m from the ground level.
2. A part of a stud-hole, not equipped with a pumping device, shall be at least 0,9 m from the level of the ground and shall be secured by a durable and impermeable cover, protecting the interior of the well and the water-drawing device.
3. A part of a stud well-being, equipped with a pumping device, shall be at least 0,2 m high from the ground level. The cover shall be fitted to the housing and shall be made of impermeable material and have a load capacity suitable for the intended load.
4. The teren surrounding the pit well, in a belt of at least 1 m wide, counting from the outside of the well enclosure, shall be covered with paved surface, with a decrease of 2% in the outer direction.
§ 33. [ Land Protection] On the basis of groundwater, an area of at least 1 m radius of a radius of at least 1 m shall be secured in accordance with Article 32 (1) (b) of the EC- 4, and the passage of the weld pipe by the hardened surface shall be sealed.
Chapter 7
Non-tidal-free tanks for liquid impurities
§ 34. [ Tanks for liquid uncleanness] Liquid impurities can only be used on construction sites that do not have the capacity to join the sewage network and are not allowed to be used in areas subject to special environmental protection and exposed to floods and the flooding of rainfall.
§ 35. [ Low-flow Tanks] Non-tidal tanks for liquid impurities, non-sewage-free (non-sewer) and sewerage systems and waste disposal tanks should have bottoms and walls which are impermeable, tightly covered by the A shutting hole to remove the uncleanness and retaliation of at least 0,5 m above the ground level.
§ 36. [ Covers and ventilation outlet] 1. Distance of the covers and outlet of ventilation from non-drainage tanks to liquid impurities, pits of non-drained paragraphs having a number of seats of not more than 4 and similar sanitary-economic devices with a capacity of up to 10 m 3 shall be at least:
1) from windows and external doors to the premises intended for the stay of the people and to the warehouses of food products-15 m;
2) from the border of the adjacent parcel, road (street) or a pedestrian-7,5 m.
2. In the construction of a one-sided, homestead and recreation of the individual distance of the sanitary-economic devices referred to in the mouth. 1, shall be at least:
1) from windows and external doors to spaces intended for the stay of people-5 m, but this does not apply to the subsidised pits in the one-sided construction;
2) from the border of a neighbouring plot, road (street) or a pedestrian route-2 m.
3. Distance of the covers and departures of ventilation from the pits of non-drained paragraphs with a number of seats greater than 4 and non-drainage tanks for liquid impurities and composters with a capacity greater than 10 m 3 up to 50 m 3 shall be at least:
1) from windows and external doors to the premises mentioned in the paragraph. 1 points 1-30 m;
2) from the border of the plot of adjacent land-7,5 m;
3) from the line of the demarcating road (street) or pedestrian-10 m.
4. The competent authority in the decision on the conditions for the construction and development of the site, in agreement with the state provincial health inspectorate, may determine for the construction plots located at the built-up plots of adjacent distances less than specified in paragraph. 1 and 2.
5. Critical non-liquid tanks for liquid impurities and progressive dossiers can be placed at a distance of less than 2 m from the border, including at the border of the parcels, if they are adjacent to similar equipment in a neighbouring parcel, provided that the retention of the distance referred to in § 31 and § 36.
6. Proximities of non-drainage tanks to liquid and composters with a capacity greater than 50 m 3 from buildings intended for the stay of people should be taken according to the indication of technical expertise, adopted by the state provincial health inspector.
§ 37. [ Instantaneous underground settlers] Flow-through underground settlers, forming part of the household sewage treatment plant, for pre-treatment, may be placed in the immediate vicinity of single-family buildings, provided that they are discharged their response by a sewage system of at least 0,6 m above the upper edge of the windows and external doors in these buildings.
§ 38. [ Distance of tanks from windows and doors] The distance of mudslides, mineral and fat paws, sewage neutralizers and other similar tanks from open windows and external doors to spaces intended for human being should be at least 5 m if the separate provisions do not provide otherwise.
Chapter 8
Greenery and recreation equipment
§ 39. [ biologically active area] On construction sites for multi-family buildings, health care buildings (except for the income) and education and education of at least 25% of the plot area shall be placed as an area of biologically active land, if Another percentage does not stem from the findings of the local zoning plan.
§ 40. [ Playground and Recreational Space] 1. In a group of multi-family buildings covered by one construction permit, according to the utility needs, provision of playgrounds for children and recreation places accessible to persons with disabilities, with at least 30% of this space be in a biological active site, unless otherwise provided for in separate provisions.
2. The sunshine of the playground for children should be at least 4 hours, counted on the days of equinox (21 March and 21 September) in hours 10 00 -16 00 In the city centre it is possible to sunshine not less than 2 hours.
3. Distance of squares and devices referred to in paragraph. 1, from the dividing lines of the street, from the windows of the premises intended for the stay of the people and from the waste collection sites should be at least 10 m.
Chapter 9
Fences
§ 41. [ Gardening] 1. The fence shall not pose a threat to the safety of humans and animals.
2. Placing on the fences, at a height of less than 1,8 m, sharply completed elements, barbed wire, stiffened glass and other similar products and materials shall be prohibited.
3. The provisions of the paragraph. 1 and 2 do not concern internal fences in detention facilities and investigative detention facilities.
§ 42. [ Gates and furrows in the fence] 1. Brams and furrows in the fence shall not open outside the plot.
2. Furies in the fencing of multi-family dwellings and public buildings shall not make it difficult for persons with disabilities to travel in wheelchairs to access them.
§ 43. [ Gateway Width] The width of the gate shall be at least 2,4 m in the light and the width of the gate shall be not less than 0,9 m, and shall be governed by separate provisions on fire protection by fire width.
SECTION III
Buildings and Rooms
Chapter 1
General requirements
§ 44. [ Requirements] The building, its functional and spatial layout, the design system and the technical and material solutions of the building elements should be designed and constructed in a manner consistent with the requirements of its location and destination and with the provisions of the Regulation and the separate provisions relating thereto.
§ 45. [ Building with rooms earmarked for people's stay] A building with a room intended for people's stay should be provided with at least water for human consumption and for fire protection purposes if separate provisions so require, and for their intended purpose-also for other purposes. In other buildings, the supply of water should be due to their use and the needs of fire protection.
§ 46. [ Installation of hot water] Residential building, collective residence, health care, social and social care, education, science, feeding, production and trade in food, and other buildings if they are equipped with bathtubs, natrients or washbasins, should have an individual or central installation of hot water. The condition of bringing warm water to the wash basin does not apply to buildings in the construction of a homestead and individual recreation.
§ 47. [ Providing wastewater disposal] The building equipped with a water supply system should be provided with waste water treatment and technological wastewater, if any.
§ 48. [ Seats for the temporary collection of waste and impurities] 1. Each building intended for the stay of the people and other buildings in which the waste and impurities are created in the course of use, should have seats adapted for the temporary collection of these wastes and impurities, situated in the building itself or in its surroundings.
2. The buildings referred to in paragraph 1. 1, except high-wall, may be equipped with internal equipment (zsyps) for disposal of waste and solid impurities.
§ 49. [ Installation for space heating] Building and premises for people's stay and other buildings, if this is due to their use, should be equipped with installations (devices) for space heating in a period of reduced temperatures, enabling the temperature to be maintained an internal air suitable for their use. This requirement does not apply to recreational buildings which are used only during the summer season.
§ 50. [ Chimneys] The building and premises where solid fuel or combustion chambers with liquid or gas fuel burners are installed should have fireplace pipes for the discharge of smoke and flue gas.
§ 51. [ Providing ventilation or air conditioning] The building and premises shall have ventilation and/or air conditioning provided as appropriate for their use.
§ 52. [ Supplying the building with gas] The building with rooms earmarked for the stay of the people may be supplied with gas from the gas network, cylinder batteries or solid gas tanks, in accordance with the conditions set out in § 156 mouth. 1 and § 157.
§ 53. [ Electrical installation] 1. The building, as appropriate to the needs arising from its purpose, should be equipped with an internal electrical installation.
2. The building should be equipped with an installation protecting from lightning discharge. This obligation refers to the buildings listed in the Polish Standards for the Protection of Odgromentary Building Objects.
§ 54. [ Personal lifts] 1. Public utility building, multi-family residential building, collective residential building not being a barracks building and any other building with the highest floor space with rooms intended to stay more than 50 people, in the of which the floor level difference between the first and the highest level of the stuffing, which is not the second level in a two-level apartment, exceeds 9.5 m, and having two or more floors of the stubborn health care building and building The social services must be equipped with a personal crane.
2. In a multi-family residential building, a collective residence building and a public utility building, equipped with cranes, it is necessary to provide access from the ground level and access to all the usable floors for the disabled.
3. In the case of the incorporation or the build-up of the lever shaft to the existing building, the location of the stop doors at the level of the inter-storey spoon is permitted if access to the usable floor of the persons is provided. disabled.
§ 55. [ Ensuring the feasibility of a slipway] 1. In a multi-family residential building not equipped with cranes, it is necessary to carry out the ramp or install the appropriate technical device enabling access for the disabled to the dwellings located on the first floor of the filler and to the An underground storey containing parking spaces for passenger cars.
2. In the low house of collective residence and public utility building, which does not require the equipment in the lifts referred to in § 54 par. 1, you must install the technical devices to ensure that people with disabilities have access to the floors with the utility rooms that they can use. This does not apply to barracks, accommodation in detention facilities, investigative detention facilities, and correctional facilities and shelters for minors.
3. Non-equipments in the crane of a multi-family residential building up to 5. If all rooms on the last floor are part of two-level dwellings, the overcapacity shall be included in the filing floor.
4. In a building not equipped with a crane, on whose construction the decision of the construction permit was issued before 1 April 1995, in the attic situated directly above 4. The condition of the dwelling shall be allowed to change the floor space.
§ 56. [ Telecommunication installations] A multi-family residential building, a collective residence building and a public utility building should be equipped with a telecommunication installation and, where necessary, also in other installations such as: industrial television, signalling bell or door-to-door, in such a way that it is possible to protect the installation from unauthorged access.
Chapter 2
Lighting and sunshine
§ 57. [ Daily Lighting] 1. The accommodation intended for the stay of the people should have provided the lighting daily, adjusted to its purpose, shape and size, taking into account the conditions set out in § 13 and in the general health and safety regulations of the work.
2. In a room dedicated to people's stay, the ratio of the windows surface, calculated in the light of the frames, to the floor area should be at least 1:8, while in another room where the daytime lighting is required for reasons of destination-at least 1:12.
§ 58. [ Lighting Room Lighting] 1. Only an artificial light shall be allowed for the illumination of a room intended for human stay, if:
1) daylight lighting is not necessary or is not advisable for technological reasons;
2) is justified by the functional purpose of locating this room in an underground facility or in a part of a building devoid of daylight.
2. Where the room referred to in paragraph 1 1, is a permanent job room within the meaning of the general health and safety regulations, for the use of only artificial light lighting, including electric, is required to obtain the consent of the competent state voivodship the health inspector, in agreement with the competent district labour inspector.
3. The agreement referred to in paragraph 3. 2, does not concern buildings for the defence of the State.
§ 59. [ General illumination with artificial light] 1. The premises intended for human stay and for general traffic (communication) should be provided with illumination of artificial light according to the needs of the utility.
2. General lighting of a room for permanent residence of people shall provide the appropriate conditions for the use of the whole area of the space.
3. The lighting of the artificial light of the interconnected rooms for the permanent residence of humans and for general traffic (communication) shall not show any difference in intensity, causing a pressure when switching between these rooms.
§ 60. [ Sunshine Time] 1. The premises intended for the collective residence of children in nursery, kindergarten and school, with the exception of chemical, physical and plastic workers, should have the time of sunshine provided at least 3 hours on the days of the equinox (21 March and 21 (September) 8 00 -16 00 , while living rooms-in hours 7 00 -17 00 .
2. In a multi-room apartment, the requirement of the paragraph may be reduced. 1 to at least one room, with the addition of required sunshine time up to 1.5 hours in the centre of the supplementary construction site, and in respect of one-room dwelling in such a building it is not required to be specified the time of sunshine.
Chapter 3
Entrance to buildings and apartments
§ 61. [ Entrance to buildings and apartments] 1. The location of the entrance door to the building and the shape and dimensions of the entrance rooms should enable convenient traffic conditions, including those for the disabled.
2. Requirement of adaptation for persons with disabilities does not apply to residential buildings in single-family and homestead buildings as well as individual recreation buildings, barracks, as well as buildings in penal facilities and arrests and in correctional facilities and shelters for minors.
§ 62. [ Entrance Doors] 1. The entrance door to the building and the public spaces of use and to the dwellings shall be in the light of at least the width of 0,9 m and the height of 2 m. If the outer door is used, the width of the main wing shall not be less than 0,9 m.
2. A rotary or pendulum door may be used in the entrants to the building and the public spaces, provided that the doors are situated on them, whether or not they are scattered, adapted to the movement of persons with disabilities, and the doors to which they are requirements § 240.
3. At the door referred to in the mouth. 1, and in the door to dwellings and dwellings in a collective residence building, the height of the thresholds shall not exceed 0,02 m.
§ 63. [ Protection against refrigerated air supply] Entry from the outside into the building and premises intended for people's stay should be protected from excessive supply of cool air through the use of a atrium, air curtain or other non-obstructing solutions. These requirements do not apply to additional inputs unforeseen for permanent use.
§ 64. [ Electric exterior lighting] The entrance to the building and to each staircase should have an electrical exterior lighting. This does not apply to the construction of an endangerment and recreational
§ 65. (repealed).
Chapter 4
Stairs and slipways
§ 66. [ Schody and slipways] In order to ensure access to premises situated at different levels, permanent stairs should be used, and depending on the purpose of the building, also slipways corresponding to the conditions laid down in the Regulation.
§ 67. [ Schody or inclined moving] The installation in the building of stairs or mobile slipways does not exempt from the obligation to use the staircase or the inclined constants.
§ 68. [ Border dimensions of fixed staircase in buildings] 1. The granite dimensions of the fixed staircase in buildings of different purpose are defined by the table:
| Purpose of buildings |
Minimum usable width (m) |
Maximum degrees (m) |
|
| running |
spoon |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
| Residential and hometown buildings and two-level dwellings |
0.8 |
0.8 |
0.19 |
| Multi-family dwellings, collective residence buildings *) and public buildings *) , excluding the buildings of health care facilities, as well as production buildings *) , warehouses and services, in which more than 10 people are employed |
1.2 |
1.5 |
0.175 |
| Kindergartens and nurseries |
1.2 |
1.3 |
0.15 |
| Health Care Buildings *) |
1.4 |
1.5 |
0.15 |
| Built-in and slow-standing garages (multi-station) and service buildings employing up to 10 people |
0.9 |
0.9 |
0.19 |
| In all buildings, regardless of their purpose, the staircase to the underground floor, the technical rooms and the attic of the non-commercial |
0.8 |
0.8 |
0.2 |
*) In the case of those buildings, the operating width of the staircase and of the spoon shall be taken with regard to the requirements of the paragraph. 2.
2. In public buildings and in production buildings the total operating width of the gears and the total use width of the welders in the staircases, constituting the escape route, shall be calculated in proportion to the number of persons who may be able to be present at the same time on the floor on which the largest number is expected to be present, taking at least 0,6 m in width per 100 persons, but not less than that specified in the mouth. 1.
3. The operating width of the exterior staircase to the building shall be at least 1,2 m, and shall not be less than the useful width of the staircase in the building, adopted in accordance with the requirements set out in paragraph. 1 and 2.
4. The operating width of the fixed staircase shall be measured between the internal edges of the railing and, in the case of a one-sided balustrade, between the finished surface of the wall and the inner edge of the railings of the balustrade. These widths cannot be constrained by the installed devices and building elements.
§ 69. [ Number of degrees in one gear staircase] 1. The number of degrees in one gear of the fixed staircase shall be no more than:
1) 14 degrees-in the health care building;
2) 17 degrees-in other buildings.
2. The requirement referred to in paragraph 2. Article 1 (2) does not apply to buildings in the construction of a single family and in the construction of a homestead and of buildings for individual recreation, two-level dwellings and technical equipment.
3. The number of degrees in one gear of the external staircase shall not be more than 10.
4. The width of the degrees of the standing staircase should be due to the condition of the specified pattern: 2h + s = 0,6 to 0,65 m, where h is the height of the degree, s-its width.
5. The width of the external staircase at the main entrances to the building should be in multi-family residential buildings and public buildings of at least 0.35 m.
6. The width of the range of stair stair should be at least 0,25 m and in the treatment steps and curly width, this width shall be ensured at a distance of not more than 0,4 m from the rail or post-rail railings. Concentric staircase construction.
7. In the building of the health care facility the use of the treatment and fan stair as intended for the movement of patients is prohibited.
8. In health care buildings, as well as collective residence buildings intended for the elderly and disabled, it is forbidden to use steps of stair with noses and undercuts.
§ 70. [ Maximum incline slope] The maximum incline inclination of the building shall not exceed the size specified in the following table:
| Use of slipways |
Location of slipways |
|
| outside, without overlaching% inclination |
inside the building or under the roof Incline% |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| For pedestrian traffic and for disabled persons moving using a wheelchair, at the height of the slipways: |
|
|
| (a) to 0,15 m |
15 |
15 |
| (b) to 0,5 m |
8 |
10 |
| (c) over 0,5 m *) |
6 |
8 |
| For cars in multi-station garages: |
|
|
| a) one-and two-level |
15 |
20 |
| (b) multi-level |
15 |
15 |
| For cars in individual garages |
25 |
25 |
* ) Slipways for pedestrian traffic and for people with disabilities with a length of more than 9 m should be divided into shorter sections, using welders of at least 1,4 m length.
§ 71. [ Favourably intended for disabled persons] 1. Favourably intended for persons with disabilities should have a movement plane width of 1,2 m, curbs with a height of at least 0,07 m and mutual sureties corresponding to the conditions set out in § 298, with the spacing between them should be Within 1 m to 1.1 m.
2. The length of the horizontal plane of the movement at the beginning and at the end of the ramp shall be at least 1.5 m.
3. The area of the spoon at the ramp for disabled persons moving in wheelchairs shall have dimensions of at least 1,5 x 1,5 m outside the box opening of the entrance door wing of the building.
4. The edges of the steps of stairs in multi-family and public buildings should be distinguished by the colour contrasting with the colour of the flooring.
Chapter 5
Premises intended for human residence
§ 72. [ Height of rooms] 1. The height of the premises for human residence shall comply with the requirements set out in the following table, where separate provisions, including those relating to the premises and premises of the health service, do not specify other requirements:
| Type of room (way of use) |
Minimum height in light (m) |
| 1 |
2 |
| Rooms in residential buildings and 1-4-bed bedrooms in collective residence buildings |
2.5 *) |
| Rooms in the attic in single-family and residential buildings and rooms in the individual recreation buildings |
2.2 *) |
| Rooms to work **) , studies and other purposes in which there are no cumbersome or health-harmful factors for permanent or temporary stay: |
|
| (a) no more than 4 persons |
2.5 |
| (b) more than 4 persons |
3.0 |
| Premises as above, but situated on the mezzanine, if there are no harmful factors for health |
2.2 |
| Rooms to work **) and other targets where there are burdensome or harmful factors for health |
3.3 |
| Premises for permanent residence of people, such as on-call duty, portierno, cantors, kiosks, including kiosks, situated in court, exhibition, commercial, sports halls, where there are no harmful factors for health |
2.2 *) |
| Premises for the temporary stay of people: |
|
| (a) where there are no harmful factors for health |
2.2 *) |
| (b) where there are adverse health factors |
2.5 |
*) On inclined strops, this is the average height between the largest and the smallest height of the room, but not less than 1,9 m. Spaces of less than 1,9 m do not fall within the corresponding purpose of the room.
**) The requirements for minimum room height in workplaces specify safety and higness rules.
2. Rooms the height of which should, in accordance with the mouth. 1, shall be at least 3 m and 3,3 m, may be reduced to a height of not less than 2,5 m in the case of application of mechanical ventilation and exhaust or air conditioning, subject to the approval of the state provincial inspector sanitary.
§ 73. [ Floor level] 1. In the living room, the floor level from the side of the wall with window and door apertures should not be below the level of the site at the building.
2. In the premises intended for the stay of the people in the building of the health care facility, social welfare, education, education and learning, the floor level should be at least 0.3 m above the site furnished by the building.
3. In the production and service room, the floor level can be located at the level of the site furnished by the building. Lowering the floor level below the site requires obtaining the consent of the State Sanitary Inspector issued in consultation with the competent District Labour Inspectorate.
§ 74. [ Public spaces with differing floor levels] In the public building, public spaces with varying levels of floors should be adapted to the movement of persons with disabilities.
§ 75. [ Door to room] 1. The door to the room for permanent residence of the people and to the kitchen room shall have at least a width of 0,8 m and a height of 2 m in the light of the frames.
2. In the utility building the interior doors, except for doors to technical and economic premises, shall be at least a width of 0.9 m and a height of 2 m in the light of the frames.
3. The doors referred to in paragraph 1 and 2, they should not have thresholds.
Chapter 6
Hygienic premises
§ 76. [ Hygienic premises] The requirements for the hygiene of the room shall be laid down in the provisions of the Regulation, as well as on health and safety at work and on civil protection. Sanitary facilities include baths, saunas, shower rooms, bathrooms, paragraphs, washrooms, locker rooms, changing rooms, laundry rooms, personal hygiene rooms for women, as well as spaces for decontamination, cleaning and drying clothing and footwear, as well as storage of equipment for maintaining cleanliness.
§ 77. [ Ventilation] 1. The hygienic room shall have ventilation complying with the provisions of the Regulation and the separate provisions.
2. The hygienic room shall be at least 2,5 m in height, except in the case of a public bath, the height of which shall be at least 3 m.
3. A reduction in the height of the hygienic room in the residential building and the hotel, the motel and the guest house up to 2,2 m in the light shall be allowed where it is equipped with mechanical ventilation of the exhaust or the exhaust and the exhaust.
§ 78. [ Walls of the room of the hygiene room] 1. The walls of the hygienic room shall be of at least 2 m of the surface washable and resistant to moisture.
2. Laundry, bathroom, washroom, shower cabin and paragraph shall be washable, non-absorbable and non-slippery.
§ 79. [ Door] 1. The door to the bathroom, the washroom and the separate paragraph shall be opened outside the room, shall have, subject to § 75 paragraph. 2, at least the width of 0,8 m and the height of 2 m in the light of the pathway, and in the lower part-openings with a total section of not less than 0,022 m 2 for air supply.
2. In bathrooms and paragraphs, except for public access, the use of sliding or folding doors is permitted.
§ 80. [ Kubatura Bathroom Room with Gravitational ventilation] 1. The cubic capacity of the bathroom with gravitational ventilation shall be at least:
1) 8 m 3 -applying in this room the gas device referred to in paragraph 172 (2). 3 point 1;
2) 6,5 m 3 -when the central heating of water or the use of an electric water heater or gas device referred to in paragraph 172 (1) is used. 3 point 2, and when the gas device is outside this room.
2. The reduction of the cubature referred to in paragraph shall be allowed. 1 point 2, but not less than 5,5 m 3 If the bathroom room is equipped with at least a mechanical ventilation of the exhaust.
§ 81. [ Spray cabins] 1. Non-closed shower cabin, which is an isolated part of the spaces of the showers and collective washrooms, should have a surface area of not less than 0,9 m 2 and a width of at least 0,9 m.
2. The closed shower cabin, separated by the walls at the entire height of the room, shall have a surface of not less than 1,5 m 2 and a width of at least 0,9 m and be equipped with mechanical ventilation of the exhaust.
3. Closed shower cabins, with devices adapted for the use of disabled persons moving in wheelchairs, should have a surface of not less than 2,5 m 2 and a width of at least 1,5 m and be equipped with assistive support devices for the use of the cab as intended.
4. A progressive cabin should be placed directly at spray cabins and collective washings.
§ 82. [ Bathrooms associated with residential rooms] 1. In the residential building of the collective bathroom connected with the residential premises should be equipped with a bath or shower and a washbasin. The progressive bowl can be located in the bathroom or in a separate room cabin equipped with a washbasin.
2. In the building referred to in paragraph. 1, without bathrooms and paragraphs related to residential premises shall be provided for each floor and shall be put into common use, with at least the following:
1) 1 a progressive bowl for 10 women;
2) 1 pass bowl and 1 pisuar for 20 men;
3) 1 spraying device for 15 persons;
4) 1 washbasin for 5 persons.
§ 83. [ Progressive Cab] A progressive cabin (split paragraph), not intended for disabled persons, shall have the smallest dimension (width) in the light of at least 0,9 m and a surface before a bowl of at least 0,6 × 0,9 m in horizontal cast, meeting also the function of the surface before the washbasin-in case of it being installed in the grounded cabin.
§ 84. [ Publicly passable paragraphs] 1. Public buildings and the work plant must be made public. If the number of persons in the premises intended for a person's stay on a given floor is less than 10, it is permissible to place the paragraph on the nearest, higher or lower floor.
2. In the buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, at least one washbasin per 20 persons, at least one progressive bowl and one pisuar per 30 men and one bowl per 20 women, should be available to the public, if the health and safety regulations do not apply to the public provide otherwise. Where there are fewer than 10 persons in the premises for permanent residence of people, a common paragraph for men and women may be placed.
3. In the buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, the distance from the workplace or people's place of residence to the nearest paragraph shall not be greater than 75 m, and from the position of the protection work-than 50 m.
§ 85. [ Inputs from general communication roads] 1. Public services in collective, public or public buildings should have access to general communication channels.
2. In public paragraphs, the following shall be used:
1) the vestibule, separated by walls full of the entire height of the room, in which only washbasins can be installed;
2) a door with a width of at least 0,9 m;
3. a door for outdoor cabins opening on the outside, with a width of at least 0,8 m, and for the cabins adapted for the needs of persons with disabilities, at least 0,9 m;
4. bulkheads dividing the women's paragraph from the male, executed as a full wall on the entire height of the room;
5. Passes placed in separate cabs with a width of at least 1 m and a length of 1,10 m, with walls and doors of at least 2 m high with a ground overpass of 0,15 m; separations do not require passages for children in nurseries and kindergartens;
6) drainage vans with a siphon and a black fittings with a hose connector in the rooms with a writing or having more than 4 ducts of the right;
7. gravity or mechanical ventilation-in the paragraphs with a window and one cab, and in other-mechanical means of continuous operation or automatically switched on.
3. The vestibals referred to in paragraph 2 (1), do not require a concession at the classrooms in nurseries and kindergartens and the rooms for the patients in hospitals.
§ 86. [ Adaptation of premises for disabled persons] 1. In the building, on the floors accessible to disabled persons, at least one of the public sanitary facilities should be adapted for these persons by:
1. ensuring a manoeuvring space with dimensions of at least 1,5 × 1,5 m;
2) use in these spaces and on the route directions to them doors without thresholds;
(3) the installation of suitably adapted, at least one of the advances and washbasins, as well as of one spray, if, by reason of its use, such equipment is envisaged in the building;
4) install handles to facilitate the use of hygienic devices.
2. The use of a single paragraph for persons with disabilities without the vestibule separating from general communication is allowed.
§ 87. [ Situation of public appeases] 1. Public marks should be placed in areas equipped with a water supply and sewerage network.
2. The situation of public appeals in non-sewage sites shall be allowed as buildings with leakage tanks of uncleanness.
3. The situation of temporary non-seized public concessions in the areas of the surveyed shall be allowed, with the consent of the state-owned sanitary inspector.
4. Public access shall comply with the requirements laid down in § 85 and have a progressive cab with dimensions of at least 1,5 m in length and 1 m wide.
5. In the public paragraph, at least one drain on the drainage system with a siphon and the black fittings with the hose connector shall be installed.
6. In the public paragraph, at least one cabin should be adapted to the needs of persons with disabilities, in accordance with § 86.
§ 88. [ Entrance to public paragraph] 1. The entrance to the public paragraph, embedded in another object, shall not lead directly from the staircase or other road of general communication in the building or from the room intended for the stay of the people.
2. The distance from windows and doors of public paragraph to windows and doors to spaces intended for people's stay and for the production and storage of foodstuffs and pharmaceutical products shall not be less than 10 m.
§ 89. [ Exemption of application of the Regulation] 1. Provisions of § 73 (1) 1, § 75, 79 par. 1, § 82 and 83 and in cases of rebuilding also § 77 par. 2 of this chapter do not apply to the accommodation of accommodation of persons temporarily arrested, convicted or punished, hereinafter referred to as 'the inmates'.
2. The provisions of § 75 and 79 (1) 1 shall not apply to correctional facilities and shelters for minors.
Chapter 7
Specific requirements for dwellings in multi-family buildings
§ 90. [ Apartment in a multi-family building] The apartment in a multi-family building should meet the requirements for the accommodation for people's stay, and also the requirements set out in this chapter.
§ 91. [ Requirement to ventil the apartment] The apartment, with the exception of one-and two-room apartment, should be ventilated to the space or corner. This does not apply to an apartment in a building under construction, as well as an apartment equipped with mechanical ventilation having a continuous exhaust or an exhaust and/or exhaust operation.
§ 92. [ Kitchen and Kitchen Bay] 1. The apartment, in addition to the living rooms, should have a kitchen or a kitchen bay, a bathroom, a paragraph separated or a bowl of bathroom advances, storage space and an internal communication space.
2. The kitchen and kitchen bays should be equipped with a kitchen, sink or sink and have a spatial layout, enabling the installation of refrigerators and a device of work.
3. In a multi-family residential building in the bathrooms, it should be possible to install a bath or shower cabin, washbasin, a progressive bowl (if there is no partial paragraph), automatic home washing machine, as well as the location of a filthy container underwear. The manner in which the sanitary facilities are managed and deployed should be provided with convenient access.
4. The divisionable admission must be equipped with a washbasin.
§ 93. [ daylight lighting] 1. The housing and kitchen housing should have direct illumination of the daylight.
2. In a one-room apartment, a kitchen room with no windows or a kitchenette connected with the hallways is allowed, provided that at least ventilation is applied:
1) gravitational-in the case of electric galley;
2) mechanical exhaust-in the case of gaseous kitchen.
3. In the apartment, the kitchen may be part of a living room, subject to the use of a gravitational or mechanical ventilation in this room, with the connection of a hooker over the kitchen, and the other part of the room. also with the provision of air recovery from the room with an additional exhaust opening, situated not more than 0,15 m below the plane of the ceiling.
§ 94. [ Width in the light of room walls] 1. In a multi-family building, the width in the light of the walls of the premises shall be at least:
1) a sleeping room for one person-2.2 m;
2) the sleeping room provided for two persons-2.7 m;
3) kitchen in a one-room apartment-1.8 m;
4) kitchen in a multi-room apartment-2.4 m.
2. At least one room in the apartment should have a surface of not less than 16 m 2 .
§ 95. [ Foreroom] 1. The shape and dimensions of the hall shall be such as to permit the movement of the sick on the stretcher and the execution of the wheelchair manoeuvre in the place of change of direction of movement.
2. The bodies constituting internal communication in the apartment shall have a width in the light of at least 1,2 m, with the release of the local narrowing of up to 0,9 m on the corridor length of not more than 1,5 m.
Chapter 8
Technical and economic premises
§ 96. [ Technical Room] 1. The technical room, in which the equipment emitting noises or vibrations are installed, can be placed in the immediate vicinity of the rooms dedicated to the permanent residence of the people, provided the solutions are applied design and materials that ensure the protection of adjacent spaces against the arduous impact of these devices, as required by § 323 (1) (a) (a) of the provisions of paragraph 323 (2 2 points 2 and § 327 and the Polish Standards for the permissible values of indoor sound levels and the assessment of the impact of vibrations on buildings and on people in buildings.
2. The piles, mountings and connectors of the devices referred to in paragraph. 1, should be made in such a way that the transfer of unacceptable noise and vibrations to elements of the building and installations should be prevented.
§ 97. [ Height of the technical and economic premises] 1. The height of the technical and economic premises should not be less than 2 m, if the other provisions of the Regulation do not specify the greater requirements.
2. In the premises referred to in paragraph. 1, the height of the door and pass under the installation guides shall be in the light of at least 1,9 m, subject to § 242 paragraph. 3.
3. The height of the canals and installation spaces in the building and the revision wells should be at least 1.9 m, with the height of the ducts up to 4 m in length may be reduced to 0,9 m.
4. The distance between the control hatches in the installation channels shall not exceed 30 m. These hatches shall be on each breakdown of the channel and shall have dimensions of at least 0,6 m x 0,6 m or a diameter of 0,6 m.
5. Technical premises for laying of cables in the building (tunnels and cable spaces) should meet the requirements resulting from the standard of the Association of Polish Electricians No. N SEP-E-004:2003 Electroenergetic and Signalling Cable Lines. Design and construction.
§ 98. [ Floors] 1. Flooring in the technical and economic premises should be made in such a way as to ensure the maintenance of cleanliness, according to their intended purpose.
2. The technical and economic premises should be equipped with electrical installations and equipment adapted to their intended use, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards for these installations and equipment.
Chapter 9
Access and transition to technical equipment
§ 99. [ Coming and transitions to technical devices] 1. Doors and transitions to cranes and other technical devices may be corridors, bridges, podesta, galleries, stairs, subject to § 68 ust. 1, ladders and buckles made of non-flammable materials.
2. General requirements for reaching and going to the cranes should also be applied in the event of the execution of working to the premises and parts of the building not intended for the stay of the people, associated with the periodic maintenance of machinery and equipment and the review and maintenance of the technical condition of the building.
§ 100. [ Height] 1. Transitions and transitions shall be at least 1,9 metres in height and shall be situated above the position of work at least 2,5 m from the floor level of this post.
2. The top floor of the floorings and transitions shall not be slippery.
3. The perforating floors must not have openings with a surface area of more than 1700 mm 2 and of dimensions capable of passing through them a sphere having a diameter of more than 36 mm.
4. The horizontal outlet and the passage from the side of the open space shall be secured with a balustrade of height of 1,1 m with a cross placed half of its height and curb with a height of at least 0,15 m.
§ 101. [ Width of ladder or buckle] 1. In exceptional cases, justified on grounds of use, as a milking and crossing between different levels can serve ladders or buckles, permanently fixed to the structure.
2. The width of the ladders or buckles referred to in the mouth. 1, it shall be at least 0,5 m and the intervals between the levels shall not be greater than 0,3 m. Starting from the height of 3 m above the floor level, the ladders or buckles shall be fitted with protection devices against falls, such as protective hoops, placed in a staple of not more than 0,8 m, with vertical bars in the staple not is greater than 0,3 m.
3. The distance of ladders or buckles from the wall or other structure to which they are reinforced shall not be less than 0,15 m and the distance of the protective rim from the ladder, in the place most distant from it, shall not be less than 0,7 m and greater than 0,8 m.
4. Smailers with balustrade should be placed every 8-10 m high ladders or buckles. The upper ends of the ladders shall be taken at least 0,75 m above the entrance level (bridge) if no other protection has been applied before the fall.
Chapter 10
Garages for passenger cars
§ 102. [ Garage] Garage for storage and current, reliable passenger car service, which is a self-contained building object or a part of another object, which is a closed garage-with full external housing and closed opening, or open garage-without any external walls or with or with partial or seated walls, it shall have:
1) height in the light of the structure of at least 2,2 m and to the bottom of the wires and installation devices 2 m;
2) indoors or garage doors at least a width of 2.3 m and a height of 2 m in the light;
(3) electric lighting installation;
4) provided air exchange, in accordance with § 108;
5) floor drains with a siphon and settlers in the garage with a water pipe or fire-fighting sprinkler, in the underground garage before entering it and in a filling garage with a capacity of more than 25 cars;
6) fire-fire installation, the required regulations for fire protection, protected against freezing.
§ 103. [ Directions for cars] 1. In the garage situated below or above the terrain, it is necessary to provide access to the cars by means of a slipway with a maximum inclination of no more than specified in § 70 or apply the appropriate devices for vertical transport.
2. In a garage designed for more than 25 cars on each floor, it is necessary to use a ramp of at least 5.5 m width, enabling two-way traffic, or separate, single-band slipways with a width of at least 2,7 m for entry and Car departure.
3. In the garage intended for no more than 25 cars on the floor, only the use of the single-band slipways is allowed, provided that the signaling is installed for the traffic control.
4. In single and two-level garage, designed for not more than 10 cars on the floor, the use of a single-room slipway without traffic light is allowed.
§ 104. [ Directions (manoeuvring road)] 1. Access (manoeuvring road) to parking positions in a single-space garage (without internal walls) should have a width adjusted to the traffic conditions of such cars to be stored, and to the way of their location in relation to the the axis of the road, but at least:
1) at a perpendicular location-5,7 m;
2) at a location at an angle of 60 °-4 m;
3. at a location at an angle of 45 °-3,5 m;
4) at a parallel location-3 m.
2. The reduction of the dimension referred to in paragraph shall be allowed. 1 point 1, to 5,0 m, if the parking position is at least 2,5 m in width.
3. The parking spaces in the garage shall be at least a width of 2.3 m and a length of 5,0 m, with a distance between the sides of the car and the wall or the post-at least 0.5 m.
4. parking spaces in the garage, intended for use by disabled persons, shall be provided with a wheelchair access from the manoeuvring road to the doors of the car at least on one hand, with a width of not less than than 1,2 m.
§ 105. [ Schody] 1. In an underground garage and a multi-level filling as an outlet, the stairs corresponding to the conditions laid down in § 68 are to be used.
2. In a single-level garage, underground and filled in the ground, use as a slipway to the movement of cars, if their inclination does not exceed 10% and there is a possibility of separating the safe movement of pedestrian traffic by a width of at least 0,75 m.
3. There is no need to separate the band of pedestrian traffic on a dual-band slipway, and in a garage with a capacity of up to 25 cars inclusive on the floor-also on a single-pass ramp.
4. Parking stops for cars used by persons with disabilities shall be placed at the level of the site or on the floors accessible to those persons from the ramp, taking into account the conditions referred to in § 70.
5. In a multistorey garage or storey building in a multi-family residential building and a public utility building, lifting equipment or other lifting equipment for the use of vertical transport for disabled persons should be installed. moving in wheelchairs to other floors that require accessibility for these people.
§ 106. [ Acoustic isolation] 1. A garage located in a building of a different purpose shall have walls and ceilings, providing the required acoustic insulation referred to in § 326, and a tightness preventing the penetration of the exhaust gas or fuel vapour to the neighboring rooms, intended for the stay of the people, situated next to or above the garage.
2. An open floor space with rooms for the stay of people, except for accommodation, health care and education and learning, shall be allowed, subject to one of the following conditions:
1) the outer wall of these floors with open windows is withdrawn in relation to the wall of the wall of the garage opened or to the edge of its highest ceiling at least by 6 m, and the roof structure and its covering over the garage meet the requirements specified in § 218;
2) the location of the external walls of these floors in one plane with the face of the external wall of the garage or with the edges of its strops requires the use of non-opened windows and mechanical ventilation in those spaces It is also known as an air-conditioning system.
3. The requirement referred to in paragraph 1. 2, does not apply to single-family buildings, homestead buildings and individual recreation.
§ 107. [ A flooring in the garage] 1. The floor in the garage should have a drop to an internal or external sewage in the garage. In the construction of one-family, homestead and individual recreation, a drop of the floor directly on the unhardened land plot is allowed.
2. In the garage the edges of the plane of the floor, as well as the holes in it, shall be taken, taking into account the mouth. 1, limit the threshold (circumcision) with a height of 30 mm, preventing the water or other liquid from flowing outside and at a lower level of garages. On pedestrian traffic, this threshold shall be profiled in such a way as to allow the use of a wheelchair.
§ 108. [ Ventilation] 1. In the enclosed garage, ventilation shall be used:
1) at least natural, by ventilating the ventilation openings placed in the opposite or side walls or in garage doors, with a total net surface area of the ventilation openings of not less than 0,04 m 2 For each of the construction baffles, the stand-at position-in unheated garages of stuffed studs, built-up or built into other buildings;
2) at least gravitational, providing 1,5 times the air per hour, in heated or semi-deep garages, having no more than 10 parking positions;
3) mechanical, controlled detectors of an unacceptable level of carbon monoxide-in other garages not mentioned in points 1 and 2, and in the review channels, for professional use and repair of cars or in garages multi-station, subject to § 150 ust. 5;
4) mechanical, controlled detectors of an unacceptable level of concentration of propane-butane gas-in garages where parking of cars fuelled with propane-butane is permitted and where the floor level is below the level of the terrain.
2. In the open garage, it is necessary to ensure the ventilation of the natural storeys meeting the following requirements:
1. the total size of the unclosed openings in the outer walls on each floor shall not be less than 35 per cent of the surface of the walls, allowing for the application of fixed shutters, not to limit the free surface of the opening;
2. the distance between the pair of opposing walls with non-closed holes should not be greater than 100 m;
3) the depth of the lowest level of the floor should not be greater than 0,6 m below the level of the area directly adjacent to the wall of the external garage and in case of a greater depth-the moat of the slope of the slopes should be used. than 1:1.
Chapter 11
Specific requirements for livestock housing
§ 109. [ Room for livestock] The space intended for livestock should meet the needs arising from the principles of rational animal maintenance and the relevant operating conditions and should meet the requirements for the safety of fire buildings inventory and evacuation of animals referred to in Chapter VI of Chapter 9.
§ 110. [ Room Requirements] In the live stock room, it shall be ensured:
1. daylight or artificial illumination, adapted to the species and group of animals,
2. air exchange, required for a particular species and group of animals,
3) maintaining the correct temperature,
(4) protection against atmospheric effects and moisture from the ground and overdue livestock manure,
5) the discharge of sewage from the animals ' positions to external or internal leakage tanks,
6) equipment in installations and electrical equipment, adapted to the purpose of the premises,
and appropriate conditions for operating the service.
§ 111. (repealed).
§ 112. [ Wiring and electrical equipment] Premises intended for livestock, periodically operated, in installations and electrical equipment shall be allowed to be unequipped.
SECTION IV
Technical equipment of buildings
Chapter 1
Cold and hot water water systems
§ 113. [ Water Installation] 1. (repealed).
2. (repealed).
3. (repealed).
3a. Water supply of hot water prepared:
1. centrally-starts directly behind a fixture cutting this installation from an individual heating node, from a group heating node or from a boiler room, and ends with points of red;
2) Local-starts directly behind the fixture on the cold water supply line of the appliance for the preparation of hot water, and ends with the red points.
4. The water supply installation should be designed and constructed in such a way as to ensure the water supply of the building, in accordance with its intended purpose, and to meet the requirements laid down in the Polish Standards for the design of water supply installations.
5. The water-water installation of cold water should meet the requirements specified in the separate fire protection regulations.
6. The products used in the water supply should be selected according to the water corrosivity, so that the quality and durability of the installation will not be deteriorated, and that such effects do not result in the interaction of the materials, of which the products were made.
7. The water supply installation should have safeguards to prevent secondary water pollution, as required for the return flows specified in the Polish Reflow Protection Standard.
8. (repealed).
§ 114. [ Water pressure] 1. The water pressure in the water supply installation in the building, apart from fire hydrants, should be before each starting point of not less than 0.05 MPa (0.5 bar) and not more than 0,6 MPa (6 bar).
2. If the minimum pressure referred to in paragraph 1 1, may not be obtained due to the present constantly or periodically insufficient water pressure in the water network, the appropriate technical devices shall be used, ensuring the required size of the water in the water system in the building.
§ 115. [ Main hydrometer kit] 1. On the interconnection of the internal water supply of cold water in the building or the outside on the grounds of the construction plot with the water supply network, the set of the main watermeter should be installed, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards for the Construction of the Water Water meters in the water supply systems and the installation requirements for the watermeters.
2. The security referred to in § 113 (1) shall be installed for each set of the main watermeter from the installation site. 7.
3. In the case of the connection of an internal water pipe installation of cold water in a building or outside on the grounds of a construction plot with a water network in more than one location, a set of the main watermeter must be installed on each of these connections and the security referred to in paragraph 1. 1 and 2.
§ 116. [ Placement of the main watermeter set] 1. A set of the main watermeter, on the connection to the water supply network, should be placed in the basement of the building or on the ground floor, in a separate, easily accessible place, protected from flooding with water, freezing and access of persons not appointed. In multi-family residential buildings, collective residence and public utility buildings, this place should be a separate room.
2. The affixing of the set of the main watermeter in the well outside the building shall be permitted if it is non-basement and there is no possibility of separating on the ground floor of the building the place referred to in the paragraph. 1.
3. The water installation, made of electrical conductive materials, shall be connected by a metal wire before and after the watermeter, in accordance with the Polish Norm concerning grounding and protective conductors.
§ 117. [ Room or Wells] 1. The room or wells where the set of the main watermeter is installed shall have:
1) when placed in the basement of the building-the drain into the sewage system, secured with an anti-modelling closure, if the local conditions require it, as well as ventilation;
2) in case of placing in a water meter outside of the building-protection against the inflow of groundwater and rain, a cavity to water exhaustion and ventilation.
2. The water meter should be made of permanent material, have degrees or buckles for descent and a manhole of at least 0,6 m in diameter in the light, stocked with two covers, the top of which should be adapted to the the expected load on the pedestrian or wheeled traffic.
§ 118. [ Installation of hot water] 1. The installation of hot water should be designed and constructed in such a way that the amount of thermal energy needed to prepare this water is maintained at a reasonably low level.
2. Hot water preparation equipment installed in buildings should comply with the requirements of the separate provision on energy efficiency.
3. Heat losses on the transmission of hot water and in the circulators should be at a reasonably low level. Thermal insulation of these conductors shall comply with the requirements set out in Annex 2 to the Regulation.
§ 119. [ Heating water] In buildings where a heating system is used for the preparation of hot water, another way of heating the water should be provided during the break period.
§ 120. [ Steady water circulation] 1. In buildings, except for one-family, at risk and individual recreation, in the installation of hot water should be provided a constant circulation of water, also on sections of wires with a volume inside the cable above 3 dm 3 leading to blackpoints.
2. The water supply of hot water should enable water to be obtained at points of water at a temperature of not less than 55 ° C and not more than 60 ° C.
2a. The water supply of hot water should allow for continuous or periodic disinfection by chemical or physical method (including periodic application of the method of thermal disinfection), without reducing the durability of the installation and applied in it products. To perform thermal disinfection, it is necessary to ensure that water temperatures are not less than 70 ° C and not more than 80 ° C at the points of use.
3. Thermal insulation of hot water installations, where there is a constant water circulation, shall ensure that the requirements set out in the mouth are met. 2 and § 267 (1) 8.
4. The installation of hot water should have a protection against crossing, permissible for the installation data, pressure and temperature, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standard for the safety of the installation of hot water.
5. In the mixing fixture and the red hot water cable should be connected to the left.
§ 121. [ Heat measurement equipment] 1. In a multi-family residential building, collective residence and public utility, the equipment shall be used to measure the amount of heat or fuel used for the preparation of hot water.
2. In a multi-family residential building to measure the amount of cold and warm water, delivered to individual apartments and the premises for the common use of the inhabitants, the hydrostatic kits shall be used, in accordance with the requirements of Polish Standards, referred to in § 115 par. 1.
3. In the teams of multi-family residential buildings, supplied with warm water from a common boiler or group heating node, the device to measure the amount of heat or fuel used for the preparation of hot water can be placed outside these buildings, if the watermeters referred to in paragraph are used in these buildings. 2.
Chapter 2
Sewage and rainwater drainage
§ 122. [ Sewering Installation] 1. Sewerage system is a system of interconnected wires with equipment, utensils and wastewater drainage systems and rainwater to the first wells from the building site.
2. The sewage installation of the building should enable the discharge of sewage, as well as the rainfall waters from this building, if they are not discharged into the site of the plot, and meet the requirements set out in the Polish Norms concerning these installations.
3. (repealed).
§ 123. [ Equipment for wastewater treatment] The sewage system of the building, to which the wastewater is introduced, not complying with the conditions for the protection of the earth and water and the discharge of sewage into the sewage network, as defined by the separate provisions, should be equipped with the equipment used for the to clean-up them into compliance with those provisions.
§ 124. [ Analyzing the wine cellars] The gravitational sewage system in the premises of the building, of which the short-lived is not a possible gravitational effluent effluent, can be made subject to the installation of the protection against the flow of turning effluents from the sewage network by the use of wastewater pumping, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards for the design of wastewater pumping in gravitational sewage system inside buildings or an anti-spillage device according to the requirements of Polish Norma concerning antimodeled equipment in buildings.
§ 125. [ Ventilation Ducts] 1. The spout (foam) of the gravitational sewage system shall be derived as ventilators above the roof, as well as above the upper edge of the windows and doors located at a horizontal distance of less than 4 m from the outlet of these wires.
2. It is not required to derive more than the roof of all tubing ventilating pipes, subject to the following conditions:
1) applications on the sewage systems that are not carried out above the roof of the aeration devices of the pions and the opposing penetration of the sewage outlines from the sewage system to the premises;
2. lead over the roof of ventilators:
(a) the last vertical, counting from the sewer connection to each drainage line,
(b) at least every fifth of the other sewage piloons in the building.
3. The introduction of tubing ventilating pipes for the smoke and exhaust pipes and for the ventilation ducts of the rooms is prohibited.
4. In the case where the height of the spout (vertical) of the gravitational sewage system exceeds 10 m, the connection of the approaches on the lowest floor should meet the requirements of the Polish Standards for the design of sewage systems.
§ 126. [ Drainage of rain water] 1. Dachts and terraces, as well as the cavities at the walls of the external building should have the drainage of rain water for the extracted drainage or sewage system, and in the absence of such possibility-in accordance with § 28 mouth. 2.
2. The drainage of the rain water through the interior of the building in case of connection of the building to the general sewage system network shall be combined with a sewerage system outside the building.
3. In the case of the use of rainwater, collected in retention reservoirs, to rinse toilets, watering greenery, washing roads and pavements and other economic needs, a separate installation should be carried out for this purpose, not combined with Water installation.
§ 127. [ Freezing devices] Connection of drainage in the building to sewage drainage pipes for wastewater or rainy sewage requires the use of devices to prevent the freezing of these ducts and the passage of wastewater and gases from the grid sewage system to the ground.
Chapter 3
Internal solid waste disposal equipment
§ 128. [ Internal storage devices] Internal waste disposal and solid-state waste disposal equipment can be used in residential buildings up to 55 m high and should comply with hygienic requirements, be carried out in a way that ensures fire safety, be protected in terms of acoustical protection and shall not cause nuisance to residents.
§ 129. [ Building Device in Building] A storage device installed in a building should be subject to the following conditions:
1) must not be located directly on the walls of the premises intended for permanent residence of the people and within a distance of less than 2 m from the entrance door to those premises;
2. should be protected from freezing;
3. the entry chamber shall be separated by full walls, meeting the requirements of § 216 (1). 1, as well as having a door width of at least 0,8 m, placed in a way that allows access to the disabled;
(4) the entry into the system shall have a closure which protects against the secretion of the inhalation pipes from the pipe;
5. the syp pipe shall have an internal diameter of at least 0,4 m;
6. the rura shall be vertically without breakdown and ventilated by a wire derived above the roof, equipped with a filter and a fan of the exhaust;
7. the zsyp tube shall be smooth inside, made of durable, non-combusted, non-absorbent and resistant to the destructive chemical effects of the waste and the impact of the decay.
§ 130. [ Upper and lower compartments of the system] 1. The upper chamber of the connection with the cleaning and disinfecting equipment of the zip device shall be located on the highest placed hole in the water.
2. Under the lowest inlet opening, there shall be a lower chamber of the zsyp with the containers for the collection of waste. The capacity of the bottom compartment of the system, the driving conditions and the width of the door opening to it shall be such as to enable the use of mobile waste containers of the size used in the purification area concerned.
3. The upper and lower compartments of the zsyp should have:
1) walls and flooring from non-absorbable material, easily washable;
2. cold rinsing and hot water rinsing equipment;
3) drain on the sewage system;
4) air supply and independent exhaust ventilation;
5) entrance without thresholds, closed doors full, open outdoors;
6) electric lighting installation.
§ 131. [ Technical solutions for the equipment of the equipment] Technical solutions of the bulk devices should meet the requirements of the Polish Standards for these devices.
Chapter 4
Heating installations
§ 132. [ Installation of heating] 1. A building which, owing to its use requires heating, should be equipped with a heating system or other heaters, not furnaces, kitchenware or fireplace.
2. The use of furnaces and kitchenettes for solid fuel in buildings of up to 3 floors inclusive, if not contradicted by the findings of the local spatial development plan, shall be allowed, including in buildings health care establishments, social services for children and young people, catering establishments and premises intended for the production of food and pharmaceuticals-subject to the consent of the competent State Health Superintendent.
3. Wood-fired cells with open fire or closed fireplace insert can be installed only in single-family buildings, residential buildings and individual recreation and low multi-family buildings, in Premises:
1) with a cubature resulting from the 4 m indicator 3 /kW with a nominal heat output of the fireplace but not less than 30 m 3 ;
2) meeting the ventilation requirements referred to in § 150 paragraph. 9;
3. having fireplace wires as defined in § 140 ust. 1 and 2 and § 145 (1) 1;
4) in which there is a possibility of air supply to the fireplace in quantity:
(a) at least 10 m 3 /h at 1 kW nominal thermal power of the fireplace-for fireplaces with a closed housing,
(b) providing not less airflow velocity in the combustion chamber orifice than 0,2 m/s-for open-enclosure fireplace.
§ 133. [ Type of installation] 1. Water heating system is a system of interconnected wires with fittings, circulation pumps, radiators and other equipment, located behind valves separating from the source of heat, such as a boiler room, a heat exchanger's individual or group, solar collectors or heat pump.
2. The air heating system is a system of combined ducts and air ducts, together with the airflow and air flow control, and the components of the air flow control, between the heat source heating and heated air rooms. The air heating function can also be used for mechanical ventilation.
3. The installation of water heaters shall be protected against excessive increases in pressure and temperature, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards for the security of water heating installations.
4. The products used in the water heating system should be selected according to the requirements of the Polish Standard for the quality of water in heating installations and taking into account the corrosivity of water and the possibility of applying protection against corrosion.
5. The installation of a water heater shall be designed in such a way that the amount of complementary water can be maintained at a reasonable low level.
6. The installation of a water heater closed or equipped with an automatic adjustment fittings should have a local answer device according to the requirements of the Polish Standards for the vent of water heating installations.
7. The use of a solid fuel boiler shall be prohibited for the power supply of a water-heating system of a closed system, equipped with a divination, with the exception of a solid fuel boiler, with a nominal output of up to 300 kW, equipped with a device for the discharge of heat.
8. Installation of a water heater closed with radiators, in part or in whole can be adapted to operate as a water cooling system, provided the requirements of the Polish Standards for Water Quality in Installations are met heating and securing of the installation of water heaters, closed with remodeled vessels.
9. The heat losses on the power supply and return water systems of central heating should be at a reasonably low level. Thermal insulation of these conductors shall comply with the requirements set out in Annex 2 to the Regulation.
10. Heat losses on air heating conductors should be at a reasonably low level. Thermal insulation of these conductors shall comply with the requirements set out in Annex 2 to the Regulation.
§ 134. [ Calculation of peak heat output] 1. Installations and heating installations of the building should have a peak thermal power determined according to the Polish Standards for the calculation of the heat demand of the premises, as well as calculation of heat resistance and heat transfer coefficient construction divisions.
2. For the calculation of peak thermal power, the external computational temperatures according to the Polish Standard for the calculation of external temperatures and the design temperatures of heated rooms shall be taken, according to the following table:
| Computational temperatures *) |
Purpose or use of premises |
Room examples |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| + 5 °C |
-not intended for human being, -industrial-during the operation of duty heating (if technological considerations permit) |
warehouses without permanent service, individual garages, parking halls (without overhaul), batteries, machinery and windows of personal lifts |
| + 8 °C |
-in which there are no heat gains, and the one-time stay of persons in motion and in external covers does not exceed 1 h, |
staircases in residential buildings, |
| -in which there are heat gains from technology equipment, lighting, etc., exceeding 25 W per 1 m 3 room cubature |
Compressors, pumping, couplings, harters, heat treatment departments |
|
| + 12 °C |
-in which there are no heat gains intended for the permanent residence of people, contained in external covers or performing physical work with an energy expenditure of more than 300 W, |
warehouses and warehouses requiring constant handling, entrance hole, waiting at the spectacle rooms without locker room, |
| -in which there are heat gains from technology equipment, lighting, etc., ranging from 10 to 25 W per 1 m 3 room cubature |
physical work halls with an energy output of more than 300 W, formierni halls, refrigerated machinery, battery chargers, trade fair halls, fish and meat shops |
|
| + 16 °C |
-in which there are no heat gains intended for human stay: -in outer covers in a sitting and standing position, |
Spectacle rooms without locker rooms, public appeals, exterior cover, production halls, gymnastics halls, |
| -without external cover, in motion or in the exercise of physical work, with an energy expenditure of up to 300 W, -in which there are heat gains from technological equipment, lighting, etc., not exceeding 10 W per 1 m 3 room cubature |
individual kitchens equipped with carbon palpable |
|
| + 20 °C |
-intended for permanent residence of people without external cover, without continuous physical work |
living rooms, prerooms, individual kitchens equipped with gas or electric smoking-rooms, office rooms, meeting rooms |
| + 24 °C |
-intended to be undone, -intended for the stay of people without clothing |
bathrooms, dressing rooms, washrooms, shower rooms, swimming halls, doctor's offices, children's halls and children's rooms in nurseries, operating rooms |
| *) Other computational temperatures may be used for heated rooms than those specified in the table, if this is due to technological requirements. |
||
3. The equipment used for heating installations referred to in the separate provision for energy efficiency shall comply with the requirements set out in that provision.
4. Grzejniki and other devices receiving heat from the heating system shall be supplied with the heat supply regulators. This requirement does not apply to heating installations in accommodation facilities in detention facilities and investigative arrests.
5. In a building powered by a district heating network and in a building with its own (individual) source of heat for fuel oil, gas fuel or electricity, the regulators of heat flow to the radiators should operate automatically, depending on the changes indoor temperatures in the rooms where they are installed. This requirement does not apply to single-family buildings, residential buildings and individual recreation, as well as individual dwellings and commercial premises equipped with own heating installations.
6. The devices referred to in paragraph. 5, should enable users to obtain lower than computative temperatures at the premises, with no less than 16 ° C in rooms with a capacity of 20 ° C or higher.
7. Heating installations powered from district heating networks shall be controlled by a device for the control of heat flow, operating automatically, according to changes in external climatic conditions.
8. If the demand for heat or the use of individual parts of the building is clearly varied, the installation of the heater shall be properly divided into independent branches (the two-circuit branches).
9. In a building where during the heating season there are periodic interruptions in use, the heating system shall be fitted with equipment enabling the heat flow to be reduced during the period of interruption.
10. The individual parts of the heating system shall be equipped with a fixture to enable the heat flow to be closed to them and to be emptied from the heating medium without having to stop the remaining part of the installation.
§ 135. [ Control and measurement apparatus] 1. The heating systems shall be equipped with appropriate control and measurement equipment to ensure their safe use.
2. In buildings with a heating installation, the heating network shall be provided with equipment used for the accounting of heat used:
1) a heat meter (measurement system) for measuring the amount of heat delivered to the heating installation of the building;
2) devices enabling individual clearing of heating costs of individual flats or commercial premises in the building.
3. In the case of power supply of a water heater from a boiler room in a building having more than one apartment or utility room, the following devices used for the accounting of the cost of heat used shall be used:
1) a device for measuring the amount of fuel used in the boiler room;
2) devices enabling individual clearing of heating costs of individual flats or commercial premises in the building.
4. Thermal insulation of the water heating system shall comply with the requirements of the Polish Standard for thermal insulation of pipelines, fittings and equipment and the provisions of § 267 (1). 8.
5. The use of steam heating and water heating systems with a temperature of a heating factor exceeding 90 ° C shall be prohibited in accommodation intended for human being.
6. (repealed).
§ 136. [ Intended for the installation of boilers] (1) The premises intended for the installation of solid fuel boilers and fuel storage rooms and slag rooms and spaces intended for the installation of boilers for heating oil and fuel oil warehouse spaces should comply with the provisions of the of the Regulation, including those referred to in Paragraph 220 (1). 1.
2. Fixed fuel boilers with a thermal capacity of up to 25 kW should be installed in separate technical rooms located on the floor of the underground, at the level of heated rooms or in other premises where they can be installed boilers with larger nominal thermal power. The fuel composition shall be placed in a separate technical room near the boiler or in the room where the boiler is located. The rooms in which the boilers are installed and the fuel composition spaces should comply with the requirements set out in the Polish Standard for solid fuel boiler rooms.
2a. Fixed fuel boilers with a thermal capacity of up to 10 kW can be installed in the buildings referred to in § 132 par. 3, at the level of heated rooms, in premises which are not residential premises:
1) with a cubature resulting from the 4 m indicator 3 /kW nominal heat output of the boiler, but not less than 30 m 3 ,
2) meeting the ventilation requirements referred to in § 150 paragraph. 9,
3. having fireplace wires as defined in § 140 ust. 1 and 2 and § 145 (1) 1,
4) providing an air supply for combustion in a quantity of at least 10 m 3 /h at 1 kW nominal thermal power of the boiler
-corresponding to the requirements laid down in the Polish Standard for solid fuel boiler room.
3. Fixed fuel boilers with a total nominal heat output of more than 25 kW to 2000 kW should be installed in separate technical rooms located on the ground floor or at the terrain level. The composition of the fuel and the slag should be placed in separate technical rooms located directly next to the boiler room, as well as to be provided for the transport of fuel and the removal of slag and ash. The rooms in which the boilers are installed and the fuel composition spaces should comply with the requirements set out in the Polish Standard for solid fuel boiler rooms.
4. The boilers for heating oil with a total nominal heat capacity up to 30 kW can be installed indoors not intended for permanent residence of people, including also in auxiliary premises in the apartments, and in other places referred to in paragraph 5.
5. Boilers for heating oil with a total nominal heat output of more than 30 kW to 2000 kW should be installed in separate technical rooms, intended solely for this purpose in the basement or on the lowest floor of the filling or in a slow standing building dedicated exclusively to the boiler room.
6. Fixed fuel boilers or fuel oil boilers with a total nominal heat output of more than 2000 kW should be installed in a free standing building dedicated exclusively to the boiler room.
7. In the room where the boilers for solid fuel or fuel oil are installed, located above another floor of the utility, the floor, as well as the walls up to a height of 10 cm and the door thresholds of 4 cm should be watertight. The watertight condition also applies to all cable passes in the floor and in the walls up to a height of 10 cm.
8. Maximum, combined heat load, for determining the required cubature of the room in which the boilers with a power capacity of up to 2000 kW shall be installed, for fuel oil, shall not be greater than 4650 W/m 3 .
9. Cubic capacity with boilers for heating oil, referred to in paragraph. 6, should be determined individually with consideration of technical and technological requirements, as well as in operation.
10. The height of the room in which the boilers for fuel oil are to be installed shall not be less than 2,2 m and the cubature of not less than 8 m 3 .
11. In the room where the boilers for solid fuel or fuel oil are installed, it shall be provided with the necessary air flow for the correct operation of the nominal heat boilers, as well as the ventilation and exhaust air for the ventilation. Boiler room.
12. The exhaust gas from boilers to fuel oil shall comply with the requirements for gas appliances as defined in § 174 (1) (a) 1, 2, 5, 6, 8 and 9.
§ 137. [ Storage of fuel oil] 1. The storage of heating oil with a flash point above 55 ° C can be carried out in a non-pressurised, fixed surface and underground reservoir at the building or in the dedicated cellar or in the intended use only for the purpose of the installation. the lowest floor of the stuffed building, hereinafter referred to as the "warehouse" of heating oil.
2. Single tanks or batteries of tanks in fuel oil warehouses in the building should be equipped with a system of pipes for filling, refiling and oil draw and in the signaling level of filling, transmitting the signal to the place, in It is a localised filling spigot.
3. In the battery of tanks in the fuel oil warehouse in the building all the tanks should be of the same type and size, with the total volume of these tanks should not exceed 100 m 3 .
4. In the fuel oil warehouse should be made, in part or in the whole of the room, the insulation close to the penetration of the oil in the form of a capture bath, which can in the event of a failure accommodate the oil with the volume of one tank.
5. It is allowed in the room where the boilers for heating oil are installed, setting the tank of this oil with a volume not more than 1 m 3 provided:
1) to place the tank within a distance of not less than 1 m from the boiler;
2) separation of the boiler from the boiler wall with a thickness of at least 12 cm and exceeding the dimensions of the container at least by 30 cm in the vertical and by 60 cm horizontally;
3) placing the tank in the tub of the fuel oil trap.
6. The catcher referred to in paragraph 1. 4 and 5 point 3, it is not required when using fuel oil tanks with a structure that prevents the oil from getting out in the event of a failure, including a dual-fuel type.
7. The warehouse of fuel oil shall be equipped with:
1) an exhaust and exhaust ventilation, providing between 2 and 4 air exchanges per hour;
2) window or semi-fixed foam fire extinguishing device.
8. Only central water heating may be used in the fuel oil warehouse.
9. Applied to the storage of fuel oil tanks, tanks of tanks and wires made of plastic should be protected against static electricity, in accordance with the conditions specified in the Polish Standards concerning this protection.
§ 138. [ Housing of heating installations] The housing of the heating installation should be such as to enable the installation to be replaced without disturbing the structure of the building.
§ 139. [ Water components of heating installations] The water components of the heating installations, exposed to an intensive supply of the outside air in the winter, should be protected from freezing and have, in areas of this demanding, heat insulation, protecting against excessive heat losses.
Chapter 5
Chimney pipes
§ 140. [ Chimneys] 1. Fireplace (ducts) in the building: ventilation, combustion and smoke, carried out in the walls of the building, in enclosures, permanently connected with the structure or constituting the self-constructions, should have the dimension of the section, the way of conducting and the height, creating a required sequence, providing the required throughput, and meeting the requirements set out in the Polish Standards for technical requirements for chimney pipes and chimney design.
2. Fireplace switches should be sealed and meet the conditions set out in § 266.
3. (repealed).
4. The internal surface of the drainage pipes shall be resistant to their destructive effects.
5. Fireplace conductions for gravitational ventilation should have a section surface of at least 0,016 m 2 and the smallest cross-sectional dimension of at least 0,1 m.
§ 141. [ Prohibition of bulk conductors] It shall not be used:
1) the gravitational tanks of the exhaust and smoke pipes, subject to § 174 paragraph. 3;
2) collective gravitational ventilation ducts;
3) individual exhaust fans in the rooms in which the inlets of the exhaust gas are located.
§ 142. [ Output of chimneys] 1. Fireplace shall be carried out above the roof at the height of the protection against unacceptable disruption of the course.
2. The requirement of a paragraph. 1 shall be deemed to be satisfied if the discharge of the chimney pipes is carried out above the roof in the manner specified by the Polish Standard for masonry chimneys.
3. It is permissible to remove exhaust pipes from the gas appliances with the closed combustion chamber directly through the external walls of the buildings, subject to the conditions set out in § 175.
§ 143. [ Nasady chimneys] 1. In buildings situated in the II and III zones of wind load, defined by the Polish Norms, it is necessary to use the smoke conductors and exhaust fumes to prevent the inversion of the course, subject to the requirements of § 146 (1). 1.
2. The chimney cases referred to in the mouth. 1, should also be used in other areas, if the location of buildings and local topographical conditions require this.
3. The requirements of the paragraph. 1 and 2 do not apply to furnace burners and combustion chambers with mechanical stimulation of the flue gas.
§ 144. [ Stropami Loading] 1. The walls of which the chimney hoses are located may be laden with ceilings, provided that the safety requirements of the structure are met, and if this does not result in leakage or limitation of the light of the wires.
2. The three chimneys separated or separated from the structure of the building cannot be charged with stropes or included in the calculation as part of this structure.
§ 145. [ Kitchen hobs and heating boilers] 1. Kitchen-boilers and heating boilers for solid fuel and fireplaces with open pallets or a closed fireplace insert with the size of the fireplace opening up to 0.25 m 2 can only be attached to own, self-made smoke chimney with at least 0,14 x 0,14 m or a diameter of 0,15 m, and in the case of kitchenware type of restaurant and fireplace with larger aperts A minimum of 0,14 x 0,27 m or a diameter of 0,18 m, where the ratio of the sides of the box is to be maintained for the larger conductors of the sides of the sides 3:2.
2. Solid fuel furnoses, having a sealed closure, may be attached to a single pipe of smoke of at least 0,14 × 0,14 m or diameter 0,15 m, provided that the level of incorporation of at least 1,5 m is maintained and not to attach more than 3 furnaces to this cable.
3. The Piece referred to in paragraph. 2, situated on the highest floor shall be attached to a separate smoke pipe.
4. Connection of gaseous devices to exhaust pipes shall comply with the conditions laid down in § 174 and 175.
§ 146. [ Pipe of chimney lines] 1. Outlets of chimney pipes should be available for cleaning and periodic inspection, taking into account the provisions of § 308.
2. The exhaust and smoke cables shall be equipped, as appropriate, in wiper holes or in check holes, closed with sealed doors, and in the case of wet exhaust, also in the condensation system.
Chapter 6
Ventilation and air conditioning
§ 147. [ Ventilation and air conditioning] 1. Ventilation and air conditioning should provide adequate quality of the internal environment, including the size of air exchange, its purity, temperature, relative humidity, the speed of movement in the room, while maintaining the separate provisions and requirements Polish standards for ventilation, as well as fire safety conditions and acoustic requirements specified in the regulation.
2. Mechanical or gravitational ventilation shall be provided in rooms for the stay of people, in rooms without windows being opened, as well as in other premises where, for reasons of health, technological or safety reasons it is necessary to provide air exchange.
3. The air conditioning should be used indoors, in which for reasons of commercial, hygienic, health or technological reasons it is necessary to maintain adequate internal air parameters specified in the separate regulations and in Polish The standard for the calculation of internal air calculation parameters.
4. Installable in the buildings of the ventilation and air conditioning units referred to in the separate provision on energy efficiency shall comply with the requirements set out in that provision.
§ 148. [ Mechanical Ventilation] 1. The mechanical ventilation of the exhaust or air-exhaust shall be used in high and high buildings and in other buildings where the quality of the internal environment cannot be ensured by means of gravitational ventilation. Gravitational ventilation or hybrid ventilation may be used in other buildings.
2. In the room in which mechanical ventilation or air conditioning is applied, gravity ventilation or hybrid ventilation cannot be used. This requirement does not apply to rooms with air conditioning equipment that does not collect external air.
3. In a room at risk of secretion or penetration from the outside of a substance harmful to health or a combustible substance, in quantities capable of creating an explosion hazard, an additional emergency exhaust ventilation, activated from the inside and outside the room and providing air exchange adjusted to its intended purpose, in accordance with the provisions on safety and hiring work.
4. In a room where the technological process is the source of local emission of harmful substances with unacceptable concentration or arduous odour, local extracts cooperating with the general ventilation should be used, enabling the fulfilment of the the working zone of the quality requirements of the internal environment defined in the provisions on safety and the higout of work.
5. Installation of hybrid ventilation, mechanical ventilation of the exhaust and the exhaust and exhaust ventilation should be provided with fans with adjustable performance.
§ 149. [ External Air Stream] 1. External air stream, which is driven to the premises, which is not work rooms, should comply with the requirements of the Polish ventilation standard, where in the flats this stream should be the result of the stream size air to be exported, but not less than 20 m 3 /h per person foreseen for permanent residence in the construction project.
2. The external air stream to be brought into the work spaces shall comply with the requirements of the safety and labour hygiene regulations.
3. External air brought to the premises by means of mechanical ventilation or air conditioning, polluted to a degree exceeding the requirements specified for internal air in the separate provisions on the concentration limits and Health-harmful factors should be purified prior to entry into ventilated rooms, taking into account the indoor impurities. This requirement does not apply to single-family buildings, residential buildings, and individual recreation.
4. In rooms for permanent residence of people, ventilated in a mechanical or air-conditioned way, the values of temperature, relative humidity and the speed of air movement in the rooms should be taken for calculations according to Poland The standard for computational parameters of internal air.
5. For premises intended for permanent residence of people, ventilated in a natural way, the value of internal temperature in heating periods shall be taken for the calculation according to the table in § 134 (1). 2.
§ 150. [ ventilation air flow] 1. In the case of application in the building of the flow of ventilation air between rooms or ventilation zones, in the room it is necessary to provide the direction of flow from the room with less room to the room of greater degree air pollution.
2. The flow of ventilation air in the apartments should be made from the rooms to the kitchen room or kitchen bays and to the sanitary rooms.
3. In ventilation and air conditioning installations do not connect cables from rooms with different functional and sanitary-health requirements. This does not apply to single-family buildings and individual recreation as well as isolated dwellings or utility premises with an individual organized and exhaust ventilation.
4. In ventilation and air conditioning systems, wires from the explosion enclosure shall not be able to connect to other premises.
5. Ventilation of garages and other premises not intended for the stay of people with an air of a lesser degree of contamination, free of substances harmful to health or burdensome odours, discharged from the premises Non-hygienic premises where the separate provisions do not provide otherwise.
6. Indoors in public and production facilities whose use is associated with their periodic use, the installation of mechanical ventilation should provide the possibility of limiting the intensity of the operation or its exclusion outside the period of use of the premises, in accordance with the condition of normal operation for at least one hour before and after use.
7. In the premises referred to in paragraph. 6, in the case of the occurrence of sources of contaminants harmful to the health or sources of water vapour, ensure a constant, at least half of the air exchange during the period of interruption in their use, taking into the calculation of the ventilated cubature the nominal amount of the premises, but not more than 4 m, or the periodic air exchange controlled by the level of the concentration of the pollutants.
8. Installable in the device's room, in particular using air, shall not cause interference limiting the efficiency of the operation of the ventilation.
9. In the room with furnaces for solid fuel, liquid or with gas-extracting gas devices for combustion from the room and with the gravitational discharge of the exhaust pipe from the device, the use of mechanical exhaust ventilation is prohibited.
10. The provision of the paragraph. 9 shall not apply to spaces in which the ventilation and/or overpressure ventilation is used.
11. In rooms which should be protected from the effects of impurities from the adjacent spaces and the external environment, the pressure mechanical ventilation should be used.
§ 151. [ Equipment for the recovery of heat from the exhaust air] 1. In general ventilation and exhaust ventilation systems, or air conditioning, with a capacity of 500 m 3 /h and more equipment shall be used for the recovery of heat from air that is exported at a temperature of at least 50%, or for recirculation when acceptable. In the case of recirculation, the external air flux shall not be less than the hygienic requirements. For technological ventilation, the use of heat recovery should result from technological conditions and economic account.
2. Heat recovery equipment shall have safeguards to limit the penetration between heat exchangers to:
1. 0,25% of the volume of air flow from the room-in the case of a plate exchanger and heat-tube exchanger,
2) 5% of the volume of air flow from the room-in the case of a rotary exchanger, in relation to the pressure difference of 400 Pa.
3. Air recirculation may be used when the intended use of the ventilated premises does not involve the occurrence of pathogenic bacteria, with the emission of substances harmful to health, burdensome odours, while maintaining the requirements of § 149 (1). 1 and the requirements for fire protection.
4. In the health care building recirculation of air may be applied only with the consent and under the conditions defined by the competent state sanitary inspector.
5. In the case of the use of air recirculation in installations of mechanical ventilation and exhaust ventilation or air conditioning, adjustment systems shall be used to allow for favourable weather conditions to increase the proportion of external air to the 100%.
6. The provision of the paragraph. It shall not be used in cases where increasing the ventilation air stream would prevent the level of purity of the air required by the technological considerations.
7. The requirements of the paragraph. 1 may not be used for an installation used less than 1000 hours a year for less than 1 000 hours per year.
§ 152. [ Air Cheres] 1. Air intake in ventilation and air conditioning systems shall be protected against precipitation and wind operation and be located in such a way as to be able to retrieve under the data conditions as clean and as possible, during the summer, The coolest air.
2. The red air shall not be located in places where there is a danger of an influx of air being exported from the launchers and air with sprayed water coming from a cooling tower or other similar devices.
3. The air from the ground level or on the wall of the two lowest floors of the stuffed building should be at least 8 m in a horizontal throw from the streets and group of parking spaces for more than 20 cars, solid waste collection sites, sewage drainage and other sources of air pollution. The lower edge of the inlet opening shall be at least 2 m from the ground level.
4. The air from the roof of the building shall be so localised so that the bottom edge of the inlet opening is at least 0,4 m above the surface on which it is mounted and the distance of at least 6 m from the surface is preserved. Sewage dragings.
5. Air-derived from buildings or premises, contaminated to a degree exceeding the requirements specified in the separate provisions, concerning permissible types and quantities of substances polluting external air, should be cleaned before introduction into the atmosphere.
6. Air launchers in ventilation and air conditioning installations should be protected against precipitation and wind action and be located in places enabling the exhaust of the exhaust air to be carried out without causing a hazard the health of the building's users and people in its surroundings and exerting harmful effects on the building.
7. The lower edge of the opening of the launchers with a horizontal air outlet, situated on the roof of the building, shall be at least 0,4 m above the surface on which the projection is mounted, and 0,4 m above the line joining the highest sticking points over the roof of the building, located at a distance of 10 m from the launcher, measuring in horizontal throw.
8. Reposition of air launchers at the level of the land shall be permissible only with the consent and under the conditions specified by the competent state sanitary inspector.
9. The situation of air launchers in the building wall shall be allowed, provided that:
1) the exhaust air does not contain burdensome odours and contaminants that are harmful to health;
2) the opposite wall of the adjacent building with windows is located at a distance of at least 10 m or with no windows at a distance of at least 8 m;
3) the windows in the same wall are spaced at the level from the launcher of at least 3 m, and below or above the launchers-at least 2 m;
4) the air intake, located in the same wall of the building, is located below or at the same level as the launcher, at a distance of at least 1.5 m.
10. The fuse and air outcasts on the roof of the building should be located outside the danger zones of the explosion, preserving between them the distance of not less than 10 m at the horizontal throw and 6 m at the vertical throw, with the launcher being positioned at least 1 m above the melon.
11. The distance referred to in paragraph. 10, may not be retained in the case of the use of blocked ventilation devices, which include a black air and air launcher, which ensure an effective separation of the fresh air stream from the exhaust gas that is being exported. This does not apply to the removal of air containing contaminants harmful to health, burdensome smells or flammable substances.
12. The distance of the roof launchers, measured in horizontal projection, shall not be less than 3 m from:
1) the edge of the roof, below which the windows are located;
2) the nearest edge of the window in the roof of the roof;
3) the nearest edge of the window in the wall above the roof.
13. If the distance referred to in paragraph. 12 points 2 and 3, is between 3 m and 10 m, the lower edge of the launcher shall be at least 1 m above the highest edge of the window.
14. In the case of removal by the roof launcher of air containing impurities harmful to health or burdensome smells, subject to the paragraph. 5, the distances referred to in paragraph. 12 and 13 should be increased by 100%.
§ 153. [ Ventilation and air conditioning ducts] 1. The switches and devices of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning should be designed and made in such a way as to minimize the deposition of the impurities on their internal surfaces contacting the ventilation air.
2. The cables shall have a cross-section appropriate for the expected air flows and the design adapted to the maximum pressure and the required leakage of the installation, taking into account the Polish Standards for strength and Leak tightness.
3. The properties of the materials of the wiring or the way of securing their surfaces should be selected according to the parameters of the flowing air and to the conditions prevailing in the place of their mounting.
4. The cables installed in the places where they may be exposed to mechanical damage should be protected from these damage.
5. The conductors shall be equipped with a test openings meeting the requirements of the Polish standard on the elements of the conduits facilitating the maintenance, allowing to purify the interior of these wires as well as other devices and components of the installation, as long as their design does not allow cleaning in a different way than through these openings, but they should not be placed in rooms with increased hygiene requirements.
6. The spaces or spaces of unheated spaces shall have heat insulation, having regard to the requirements laid down in § 267 (1). 1.
7. Air conditioning systems, pipes used for air recirculation, and leading to heat recovery devices, as well as conductors of external air through heated rooms, should have heat insulation and The antimoisture content of the
§ 154. [ Devices and components of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning] 1. Equipment and components of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning should be used in such a way as to obtain the assumed quality of the environment in the room with rational use of energy for heating and cooling and electric energy.
2. Air conditioning systems shall be equipped with appropriate measuring devices for checking the working conditions and control of energy consumption.
3. Mechanical ventilation and air conditioning equipment such as control panels, ventilators, air conditioners, heaters and cooling-ventilators, shall be so installed as to ensure the possibility of their periodic inspection, maintenance, repair, or replacement.
4. The ventilation and air conditioning units located outside the building should have an appropriate enclosure or other protection against the influence of atmospheric factors.
5. In the case of rooms with special hygienic requirements, the ventilation and air conditioning units for the maintenance of heightened cleanliness inside the housing are to be used, equipped with internal lighting and sight-control speculations control panels from the outside.
6. Mechanical ventilation and air conditioning equipment shall be protected against pollution in the outside air, and in specific cases in circulating air (recirculation), by means of filters:
1) heaters, radiators and heat recovery devices-at least G4 class,
2) humidifiers-at least class F6,
specified in the Polish Standard for the classification of air filters.
7. The humidifiers in the installation of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning should be protected from the leakage of the water outside and before the transfer of the water drops through the ventilation air to the further parts of the installation.
8. The connections of fans with ventilation ducts shall be made by means of flexible connecting elements, subject to the requirements specified in § 267 paragraph. 7.
9. The installations of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning should be equipped with dampers located in places enabling adjustment of the installation, as well as cutting off of the external air flow and the outlet of the internal air. This requirement does not apply to the mechanical installation of the exhaust provided for the periodic work as a gravitational ventilation.
10. The power of the fans used in the ventilation and air conditioning systems shall not exceed the values specified in the following table:
| Seq. |
Type and use of the fan |
Maximum power of the fan [ kW/ (m 3 /s)] |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| 1 |
Centenary fan: |
|
| (a) installation of air conditioning or ventilation and exhaust ventilation with heat recovery |
1.60 |
|
| (b) installation of ventilation and exhaust ventilation without recovery of heat and ventilation of the navina |
1.25 |
|
| 2 |
Exhaust ventilator: |
|
| (a) installation of air conditioning or ventilation and exhaust ventilation with heat recovery |
1.00 |
|
| (b) installation of ventilation and exhaust ventilation without recovery of heat and ventilation of the navina |
1.00 |
|
| (c) exhaust system |
0.80 |
11. An increase in the power of the competent fan shall be allowed when the selected installation elements are used up to the value specified in the following table:
| Seq. |
Additional components of the ventilation or air conditioning installation |
Additional fan-specific power |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| 1 |
Additional degree of air filtration |
0.3 |
| 2 |
Additional degree of air filtration with H10 class filters and higher |
0.6 |
| 3 |
Filters for removing gaseous air pollutants |
0.3 |
| 4 |
Highly effective heat recovery device (temperature efficiency greater than 90%) |
0.3 |
12. Temperatures of power and return of refrigerant coolant and plane cooling elements shall be such that no condensation of water vapour on the surface of these devices is present.
13. The circulating pumps in cooling circuits and heating systems of air conditioning should be regulated by heat load.
§ 155. [ Window] 1. In residential buildings, collective residence, education, education, health care and social care, as well as in office premises intended for people's stay, not equipped with mechanical ventilation or air conditioning, windows, in order to periodic ventilation shall be designed to allow for the opening of at least 50% of the space required in accordance with paragraph 57 for the room concerned.
2. Boxes, skylights and window winds, used for the ventilation of premises intended for the stay of people, shall be provided with devices allowing easy opening and adjustment of the opening size from the floor level or a bridge, also by persons with disabilities, if there is no provision for the assistance of other shares/persons.
3. In the case of application in the premises of any type of ventilation than mechanical ventilation of the air or the air-exhaust, the supply of the external air, in the amount necessary for ventilation needs, shall be provided by the navatory devices are placed in windows, balcony doors or other parts of external partitions.
4. The infamous devices referred to in paragraph 1. 3, should be used in accordance with the requirements laid down in the Polish Standard for ventilation in residential buildings, collective residence and public utility.
Chapter 7
Gas fuel installation for gaseous fuels
§ 156. [ Supplies of buildings in gas] 1. The supply of buildings in gas and gas installations shall meet the useful needs and conditions resulting from the physicochemical properties of gas and the technical conditions of the connection to the gas network, as specified by the gas supplier.
2. Gas network installation is a system of pipes behind the main course, conducted outside or inside the building, together with fittings, shapes and other equipment, as well as equipment for measuring gas consumption, gas equipment If they are part of the equipment of the gaseous equipment, they shall be fitted with internal combustion or air-combustion pitions.
3. Gas installation with liquid gas from fixed tanks or cylinder batteries, located on a building plot outside the building, is a system of conductors behind the main valve for the installation of the tank, cylinder or cylinder collector carried out on the outside or inside the building, together with fittings, shapes and other equipment, as well as gas consumption measuring equipment, gas equipment with equipment and flue gas or air-combustion pipelines directly outside the building or to the wires in the walls.
4. Gas installation with liquid gas from an individual cylinder, located inside the building, constitutes a gas cylinder, a cylinder reduction device, a cable with fittings, shapes and other equipment, as well as a gas device together with conductors combustion or air-combustion, if they constitute a component of the gaseous equipment.
5. LPG tank installation is a unit of equipment consisting of a tank or group of tanks with fittings and fixtures and with gas connection with main shut-off valve.
6. The requirements for the gas installations referred to in the Regulation do not apply to installations intended for agricultural and production and industrial (technological) purposes.
§ 157. [ Gas installation] 1. In gas conductors, bringing the gas to the external wall of a residential building, collective residence, public utility and individual recreation, there should be no pressure higher than 500 kPa and to the external walls of the other buildings higher than 1600 kPa.
2. Gas installation in the building shall ensure that the gas fuel is supplied in a quantity corresponding to the useful needs and the appropriate value of the pressure in front of the gas devices, dependent on the type of gas fuel used to supply the gas a building, defined by the Polish Standard on gaseous fuels, with the pressure not being higher than 5 kPa.
3. A gas installation in a building of more than 35 m above the level of the site can be brought only to the technical rooms, where the gas equipment is installed, situated in the basement or on the lowest floor of the filling, and also on the highest floor of the building or on this floor, provided that the gas pressure stabilising devices are applied.
4. The use of a gas installation in buildings of a height of more than 25 m requires obtaining a positive opinion issued by the competent commander of the voivodship of the State Fire Service.
5. Gas installations fuelled with liquid gas can be performed only in low buildings.
6. The use of liquid gas and gas from the gas network shall be prohibited.
7. In a low building, which is a liquid gas plant in the apartments, it is permissible to locate a gas boiler that is supplied from the gas network.
8. Gas installations with a density greater than the density of the air cannot be used indoors, the floor level of which is below the surrounding area and where there are wells or installation channels and Review below the floor.
§ 158. [ Signalling equipment for gas supply cut-off] 1. The installations signaling an unacceptable level of gas concentration may be used in buildings where constant supervision is established, ensuring the taking of remedial action, as well as in single-family buildings.
2. Detectors signaling an unacceptable level of gas concentration in buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, should be installed in the basements and basement and in the premises where there is a possibility of gas accumulation at the emergency states of the installation or gas connection.
3. Emergency signals of explosion hazard status in buildings, excluding single-family buildings, should be directed to the services or persons obliged to take effective preventive action.
4. The installation of signaling devices shall be prohibited from the gas supply to the residential part of the multi-family building. This does not apply to individual signalling devices that cut off the gas supply to separate apartments.
5. Gas-specific signalling devices shall be used in those spaces where the total nominal heat output of the installed gaseous devices is greater than 60 kW.
6. The valve dissection of the gas supply to the building, being a component of the signaling device, should be installed outside the building, between the main course and the introduction of the wire into the building.
7. A gas installation attached to a gas network made of metal wires should be protected against the influence of the stray currents by installing the insulation inserts on the introduction of a metal gas pipe into the building.
§ 159. [ Main Cuff] 1. Gas installation of a building powered from a gas network should be installed on the junction of the main cuff, enabling the gas inflow to be cut off.
2. The main Kurek should be installed outside the building in a ventilated cabinet at least of the material difficult to ignite on the wall, in the wall bay or at a distance not exceeding 10 m from the powered building, in a place easily accessible and protected against atmospheric effects, mechanical damage and access to unauthorised persons.
3. In the construction of a single family, at risk and individual recreation it is permissible to install the main course at a distance of more than 10 m from the supplied building, in a ventilated cabinet, located in a fence line from the street or a general pedestrian route with access to it from the site of an external building plot.
4. In buildings of a monumental character it is permissible to install the main jackets in places which are easily accessible from the outside, which are not spaces, e.g. in the glitches, interiors, gates, at a distance of not more than 2 m from the outer building of the building.
5. The distance of the main course, mounted on the wall or in the recess of the building wall, from the level of the ground and the nearest edge of the window, the door or other opening in the building should be at least 0.5 m.
6. In justified cases, resulting from the solution of the functional-spatial building, more than one root cuff may be installed. In this case, the installations that are supplied from separate connectors must not be connected to each other.
7. In the compact city centre, the main course is permitted to be installed in front of the building, below the level of the site, provided that the requirements for the sluice-fittings mounted on the gas pipeline are maintained.
8. The place of location of the main course should be clearly marked. An indication of the number and locations of the installation shall be placed on a building with more than one head of main cuff.
§ 160. [ Distinct valves] 1. Where more than one building is supplied from one attachment, separate valves, other than main taps, shall be used in addition to the main course, which shall cut off the gas supply to each of these buildings.
2. In the construction of a one-sided, homestead and individual recreation, when the main cuff is installed in the fence line at a distance of more than 10 m, the wall valve is additionally applied on the wall of the building.
3. The shut-off valves referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, they shall meet the requirements laid down in § 158 (1) 6.
§ 161. [ cut-off valve] 1. In the case of a gas installation, supplied from a gas network with a pressure of up to 500 kPa and with which more than one consignee is used, or where the nominal gas consumption is greater than 10 m 3 /h, expressed as high-methane natural gas, before the reduction device, the shut-off valve shall be installed, and for this device, the cut-off valve, which is the main course.
2. In the case of a gas installation, powered from a common network with a pressure of up to 500 kPa, with which one consignee is used, and the nominal gas consumption is less than 10 m 3 /h, it is permitted that the shut-off valve installed in front of the pressure reduction device is treated as the main cuff. This provision shall also apply if the reduction device is combined into a single unit with a gas meter.
§ 162. [ Reduction devices] The reduction devices can be installed only outside the building and should be protected from the access of persons not established and mechanical damage.
§ 163. [ Gas Hose Wiring] 1. Gaseous installations, conducted below the level of the site, outside the building at a distance of more than 0,5 m from its external wall, shall meet the requirements set out in the separate provisions for gas networks.
1a. Gas installations should be carried out in such a way as to ensure fulfilment of the requirements of leakage and durability specified in the Polish Standard for Gas Piping for Buildings.
2. Gas installations, from 0.5 m in front of the external wall of the building to the shrinks in front of the gas meters in multi-family residential buildings or to the branches of utility premises in public buildings, should be made of steel pipes without seams or from steel pipes with conductive seams, complying with the requirements of the following Polish Standards, combined by welding.
3. Gas installation in residential, homestead, homestead and individual recreation buildings, starting from 0.5 m in front of the outside wall of the building to be exerted outside the inner wall of this wall, should be made of pipes, referred to as in paragraph 2.
4. In single-family dwellings, buildings in the construction site and recreation buildings of the individual gas installation, and in other buildings, only the wiring behind the gas meters or the branches leading to separate dwellings or commercial premises, should be made of the tubes referred to in paragraph. 2, also combined with threaded connections or copper tubes combined by soldering the hard solder. Other means of connecting the tubes may be used if they meet the requirements of leakage and durability specified in the Polish Standard for Gas Piping for Buildings.
5. On the external side of the walls of the building there can be no gas conductors made:
1) from steel pipes, if used for the distribution of gaseous fuels containing steam or other condensing components in operating conditions;
2) with copper tubes.
6. Gas installations for liquid gas may be carried out above the level of the area between the tank, the cylinder or the cylinder's battery and the building, and on the external wall of the building if the length of this cable is not more than 10 m, a the gas components are not condensed under operating conditions.
§ 164. [ Conducting gas installation conductors] 1. Gaseous installation guides shall not be carried out by accommodation spaces and spaces the use of which may result in a breach of the technical condition of the installation or affect the operational parameters of gas.
2. The dwellers of the gas installation wire shall be prohibited from the use of threaded connections, and also by other means of connecting the pipes, if they may pose a threat to the safety of the inhabitants.
3. Gas installations, in relation to the wiring of other installations constituting the equipment of the building (heating, sewage, electrical, lightning, etc.), shall be located in a way that ensures the safety of them use. The distance between the conductors of the gas installation and other conductors shall be such as to enable maintenance work.
4. Horizontal sections of gas installations should be located at least 0,1 m above other conduits, whereas if the density of the gas is higher than the density of the air-below the electrical conductors and the sparking devices.
5. Gas installations which cross with other installation conductors shall be at least 0,02 m away from them.
6. It is permissible to conduct gas ducts from seamless steel pipes and steel pipes with wire seams, combined by means of welding by one storey of the garage, located directly under the floor of the building's stuffy, provided Protection of these conductors against mechanical damage.
§ 165. [ Technical solutions for gas installation] 1. The technical solutions of the gas system should enable the heat elongation to be compensated for self-offset and to eliminate any deformation of the installation, caused by deformation or set-up of the building.
2. Gas installations in the cellars and suareas shall be carried out on the surface of the walls or under the ceiling, while on the other floors it is permissible to carry them in sheathed paved with unsealed screens or -with an easy-to-be-removable, planing, non-corrosion-proof, after-prior test. Filling the dirt in which the pipes of copper tubes are carried out is prohibited.
3. Gas pipes from steel pipes, after the execution of the tightness test, shall be protected against corrosion.
§ 166. [ Gazometers] 1. Gas consumption measuring devices, hereinafter referred to as "gas meters", meeting the requirements set out in the Polish Gas Meter Standard, should be installed separately for each of the recipients and protected against unauthorised access.
2. The location of the gas meters should provide easy access to their control or exchange.
3. The shut-off valve shall be installed before each gas meter. If the gas meter is installed in one locker with the main course, it is considered that this requirement is met.
4. Gazomiers can be installed:
1) in cabinets of materials at least difficult to ignites, with ventilation openings:
(a) in staircases or general corridors,
(b) outside the building, together with the head of the main gas installation, subject to the conditions set out in paragraphs 159 and 160;
2) in ventilated windows intended for installation pions, with doors without ventilation openings, available from the site of non-domestic rooms.
5. The installation of gas meters, also without cabinets, in kitchens constituting a separate room and in the prerooms of existing residential buildings, which are under reconstruction or where there is an overhaul of the gas plant.
6. The gas meters can also be installed in the separated and closed beer rooms, if they have a window opening and a gravitational ventilation cable led above the roof or by an external wall at a height of at least 2,5 m above the site, at a distance of not less than 0,5 m from the side edge of the windows, doors and other openings.
§ 167. [ Prohibition of installing gas meters] The gas meters shall not be installed:
1) in living quarters, bathrooms or other, in which there is a corrosive hazard (moisture, vapour of chemical compounds, etc.);
2) in common bays with electric meters;
3) at a distance of less than 1 m from a gas burner or other furnace in a distance of less than 1 m;
4) at a distance of less than 3 m from the gaseous device, measuring in the expansion of the length of the wire.
§ 168. [ Rules for installing gas meters] 1. The gas meter shall be installed in the range of 0,3 m to 1,8 m from the floor level to the bottom of the gas meter or at least 0,5 m from the ground level.
2. Gas meters for measuring the flow of gas with a density below the air density shall be placed above the electric meter and other devices that can ivibe, and for gas with a density greater than the air density-by at least 0,3 m below meter and such devices.
3. Gazomiers installed without cabinets, at the same level as electrical or other meters that can be fitted to the device, shall be at least 1 m away from them.
4. The reduction of the distance referred to in paragraph shall be allowed. 3, if a non-flammable bulkhead with a height of at least 0,5 m above and below the gas meter and an outlet of at least 0,1 m from the distance of the gas-meter from the wall on which it is made is carried out between these devices installed.
§ 169. [ Technical solutions for the connections of gas meters and gas equipment] The technical solutions of the connections of gas meters and gaseous devices with the installation should enable them to be dismounted without the need to dismantling the part of the installation.
§ 170. [ Gas devices] 1. Gas devices can be installed only in premises meeting the conditions for their height, cubature, ventilation and flue gas drains, as well as combustion air inflow specified in the Regulation, in the Polish Norms and separate provisions.
2. Gas devices with open combustion chamber, which means equipment of type A and B can be understood, cannot be installed in accommodation spaces, subject to § 93 paragraph. 2 and 3.
3. Gas devices with a closed combustion chamber, which shall mean a type C device, may be installed in accommodation spaces, irrespective of the type of ventilation involved, provided the coaxial conductors are used air-combustion, subject to the requirements of § 175.
§ 171. [ Self-Running Security] Gaseous devices remaining without permanent supervision during their use, such as gas boilers or space heaters, shall be equipped with a self-functioning protection against the effects of a pressure drop or a gas supply break.
§ 172. [ Maximum heat load of gaseous devices] 1. Maximum, total heat load per 1 m 3 The cubature, used to determine the required cubature of the space in which the gas devices are installed, to collect the combustion air from this room, shall not exceed the values specified in the following table:
| Types of rooms |
Maximum thermal output of gaseous devices per 1 m 3 room cubature |
|
| type A-without exhaust fumes |
type B-with exhaust exhaust |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| Premises for permanent residence of people and kitchenware connected with the anus |
175 W (150 kcal/h) |
350 W (300 kcal/h) |
| Premises not intended for permanent residence of people, including living rooms in apartments |
930 W (800 kcal/h) |
4650 W (4000 kcal/h) |
2. In the case of installation in a single room of the gas equipment without the exhaust gas and exhaust gas, the total heat load from these devices per 1 m 3 room cubias shall not exceed the size given in the table in the paragraph. 1, column 2.
3. The Kubature of the premises where the gas devices are installed shall not be less than:
1) 8 m 3 -in the case of air-to-incineration appliances from these rooms;
2) 6,5 m 3 -in the case of devices with closed combustion chamber.
4. The rooms in which the gas equipment is installed shall be at least 2,2 m.
5. In single-family buildings, residential buildings and individual recreation, erected before the date of entry into force of the regulation, the installation of gas boilers in technical rooms of the amount of which is allowed to be installed at least 1,9 m, subject to the conditions set out in paragraph 1. 1 and § 170 par. 1 and 2.
§ 173. [ Conditions] 1. When installing the gas equipment, the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
1. gas equipment shall be combined with steel or copper conductors of gas installation on a permanent basis or with flexible metal wires;
2. the gas supply to the device shall be placed in a room where the gas device is installed in a place that is easily accessible, at a distance of not more than 1 m from the connecting retaling cutter;
3. kitchens and gas cookers shall be installed at least 0,5 m from the windows to the side of the device, counting in a horizontal cast;
4. space heaters, the temperature of which the shielding temperature may exceed 60 °C, shall be installed at least 0,3 m from the walls of flammable materials, obese and at a distance of 0.6 m from the wall elements of flammable materials, non-opaque plastering;
5. flow-water gas radiators shall be installed on the walls of non-combusted materials or insulated from the wall of combusted materials from the non-combustble material.
2. Gas devices, requiring staging, such as burners, flases, solders, can be installed by means of flexible hoses intended for such purposes.
§ 174. [ Heating gas device] 1. Heating gas equipment, such as heating boilers, flow-water heaters, irrespective of their heat loads, shall be permanently connected to individual exhaust channels, taking into account the manufacturer's technical instructions the equipment referred to in the provisions on essential requirements for the appliances burning gaseous fuels.
2. The exhaust and exhaust channels discharging the exhaust gas from the gaseous equipment on a natural basis shall be overrun resulting from the calculation and shall provide the thrust pressure in the amount appropriate to the type of device and its thermal capacity.
3. The use of bulk flue-combustion systems designed to work with devices with a closed combustion chamber, equipped with a protection against the fireplace of the chimney, shall be permitted.
4. The use of individual air and combustion pipelines as a set of devices used to bring the air to the gas device and exhaust the exhaust gas shall be allowed outside.
5. A boiler room shall be allowed to attach several boilers to the common combustion channel in the case of:
1. air-to-incineration boilers from the room, provided that the crate interruptor is used, or the equipment of the boilers in the fire detectors of the fireplace which is simultaneously exclusive of all boilers;
2. execution for boilers with inflated exhaust pipe burners with a cross-section of not less than 1,6 sum of the cross-sections of the exhaust gas discharges from individual boilers, as well as the equipment of the outlet of the combustion pipe in the sensor The fireplace disappears, simultaneously excluding all boilers.
6. The exhaust and exhaust channels, discharging the exhaust gas from the heating of the gas appliances, shall be adapted to the working conditions of the device type.
7. The exhaust and exhaust channels discharging the exhaust gas from the gas appliances, excluding boilers, shall meet the following requirements:
1. transverse cross-sections of the wire and the flue-gas channel should be fixed throughout the length;
2. the length of the vertical exhaust pipe shall be not less than 0,22 m, and horizontal hoses arranged with a decrease of at least 5 per cent in the direction of the device-not greater than 2 m;
3. the length of the combustion channel measured from the axis of the inlet of the exhaust pipe to the edge of the outlet of the canal over the roof should be not less than 2 m;
4. the outlet of the exhaust channels, if this is due to the working conditions of the equipment, shall be provided with the exhaust gas selected for the amount of the exhaust gas, the length of the vertical sections, the position in the specified wind zone and the local conditions.
8. The installation of dams shall be allowed in the exhaust pipe of the individual equipment, if their operation does not interfere with the flue gas flow.
9. Gas devices equipped with inflatable burners shall be connected by conductors with internal combustion channels, the slicers of which must be selected having regard to the hypertension that occurs in the combustion chambers of these devices.
10. Above the gas appliances of the type of restaurant with the exhaust fumes from the exhaust gas to the room, the exhaust fumes shall be placed in the flue gas, with sensors for the equipment having a heat output greater than 30 kW, turning off the device in the case of a fireplace disappearance.
§ 175. [ Individual coaxial air-combustion piping] 1. Individual coaxial air-combustion piping or separate air and internal combustion pipelines from gas equipment with closed combustion chamber may be derived from the external wall of the building if the devices have the nominal power heat not greater than:
1) 21 kW-in slow-standing single-family buildings, at risk and on individual recreation;
2) 5 kW-in other residential buildings.
2. The cables of the wires referred to in paragraph. 1 point 2, shall be higher than 2,5 m above the level of the site. These flights may be less than 2,5 m but not less than 0,5 m above the terrain if there is no children's playground or other recreational areas at a distance of 8 m.
3. The distance between the outlet of the conductors referred to in paragraph. 1, it shall be not less than 3 m, and the distance of those departure from the nearest edge of the opening windows and of the locking rivals not less than 0,5 m.
4. In the production and warehouse buildings and sports and spectacle halls shall not be limited to the nominal thermal input of equipment with a closed combustion chamber, from which individual coaxial air-combustion piping or separate wiring air and exhaust are brought out by the external wall of the building, if the distance of this wall from the border of the building plot is at least 8 m, and from the wall of another building with windows not less than 12 m, and if the outlet of the wires are located higher than 3 m above the ground level.
§ 176. [ Intended for the installation of boilers] 1. The premises intended for the installation of boilers for gaseous fuels should comply with the requirements of § 172 and other provisions of the Regulation, and comply with the requirements set out in the Polish boiler room built into gas fuels by a relative density of less than 1.
2. Boilers for gaseous fuels with a combined heat capacity up to 30 kW can be installed in premises not intended for permanent residence of people and in the places referred to in the paragraph. 3.
3. The boilers for gas fuels with a total heat output of more than 30 kW to 60 kW shall be installed in the technical room or in the space provided exclusively for the boiler room of the standing building.
4. The boilers for gas fuels with a combined heat output of more than 60 kW to 2000 kW shall be installed in the intended exclusively for this purpose, or in a slow standing building intended exclusively for boiler room.
5. Boilers for gaseous fuels with a combined heat capacity of more than 2000 kW can only be installed in a slow-standing building for the boiler room.
6. The cubic capacity of boilers for gas fuels with a total heat output of up to 60 kW and with boilers with a heat output of more than 60 kW to take air out of the premises shall comply with the requirements set out in § 172.
7. The Kubatura premises with the boilers referred to in paragraph. 4 and 5, with a closed combustion chamber, should be determined individually, taking into account the technical and technological conditions, as well as the operational requirements.
8. In the room with the installed boilers referred to in paragraph. 4 and 5, it is prohibited to install equipment intended for the measurement of gas consumption.
9. To technical rooms with boilers installed with a combined heat capacity of more than 60 kW to 2000 kW, located in a building of a different purpose than boiler room, a separate gas line from which the remaining power cannot be operated gas appliances in this building.
§ 177. [ Gas devices installed in the building] The gas appliances installed in the building may be fuelled with liquid gas from individual cylinders with a nominal gas content up to 11 kg, provided that the following requirements are met:
1) in one flat, workshop or utility premises should not be installed more than two cylinders;
2. in the room where the cylinder is installed, the temperature should be lower than 35 ° C;
3. the cylinder shall be installed only in a vertical position;
4) the cylinder shall be protected against mechanical damage;
5. between the cylinder and the heat radiating device, with the exception of the sets of gas appliances with cylinders, a minimum distance of 1,5 m shall be maintained;
6. the cylinders should not be placed less than 1 m from the devices liable to cause irrigations;
7. gas devices shall be combined with a gas pressure regulator on a cylinder by a flexible hose not exceeding 3 m in length and a pressure of at least 300 kPa, resistant to liquid gas components, mechanical damage and temperature up to 60 ° C;
8. a gas device with a thermal power exceeding 10 kW shall be combined with a flexible wire referred to in point 7, a steel pipe of at least 0,5 m length.
§ 178. [ Gas installations in the building] Gas installations in a building or in a building assembly may be fuelled with liquid gas from a gas cylinder with a nominal gas content of up to 33 kg or a battery of such cylinders, provided that the following requirements are met:
1) the cylinders should be placed outside the building, in a place marked, on a hardened ground, under a roofing protecting from the influence of atmospheric agents;
2. the number of cylinders in the battery shall not exceed 10;
3) the cylinders in the battery shall be connected to a collector made of a seamless steel tube or a welded pipe by welding;
4. the distance of the cylinders from the nearest window or door openings in the external wall of the building should not be less than 2 m;
5) cylinders cannot be placed in the area of the ground.
§ 179. [ Liquid Gas Tanks] 1. Gas installations in a building or in a building assembly may be powered from one LPG tank or a group of such tanks.
2. Number of ground tanks in the group should not exceed 6 units, and their total capacity of 100 m 3 . The distance between groups of terrestrial tanks should be:
1) 7,5 m-in case the total capacity of the tanks in the group does not exceed 30 m 3 ;
2) 15 m-in case the total capacity of the tanks in the group exceeds 30 m 3 .
3. Liquid gas tanks shall not be placed in the area of the ground, in wetlands, and at a distance of less than 5 m from the ditches, wells or sewage drains.
4. The permissible distance of gas tanks with liquefied gas from residential buildings, collective residences and public buildings, as well as between reservoirs, shall be defined in the following table:
| Nominal capacity of the tank in m 3 |
Distance of residential buildings, buildings Collective residence and utility buildings public from: |
Distance from the neighboring tank ground or underground in m |
|
| ground tank in m |
underground reservoir in m |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
| 3 |
3 |
1 |
1 |
| over 3 to 5 |
5 |
2.5 |
1 |
| More than 5 to 7 |
7.5 |
3 |
1.5 |
| More than 7 to 10 |
10 |
5 |
1.5 |
| More than 10 to 40 |
20 |
10 |
¼ Sum of diameters two neighboring tanks |
| Over 40 to 65 |
30 |
15 |
|
| More than 65 to 100 |
40 |
20 |
|
5. The permissible distance of the LPG tanks from the production and storage buildings should be for tanks with a capacity of:
1) up to 10 m 3 -not less than the distance specified in the table in paragraph. 4 in columns 2 and 3;
2) over 10 m 3 -not less than half of the distance referred to in the table in paragraph. 4 in columns 2 and 3.
6. The distance of the LPG tanks from the border with the adjacent building plot should be not less than half of the distance specified in the table in the mouth. 4 in columns 2 and 3, while maintaining the required distance from the building of the given kind.
7. The distances specified in the table in the mouth. 4 in column 2 may be reduced to 50% in the case of a slow standing fire separation wall of at least R E and 120 fire resistance class, situated between the liquid gas tank and the building. The dimensions of a free standing wall and its distance from the container shall be such as to shield the container from that part of the building, which is less than that specified in the table in paragraph. 4 in column 2 from any point of the tank.
8. For liquid gas tank with a capacity of up to 10 m 3 reduction of the distance from the building referred to in paragraph. 7, may also occur if the vertical belt of the building with a width of at least equal to the parallel projection of the tank, increased after 2 m from both sides, and with a height equal to the height of the building will have a class of resistance at least R E I 120, and in this belt of the wall there will be no window and door openings.
9. Distance of the LPG tank from the projection of the horizontal gauge of the power line of the overhead line, and from the rail or tramway line electrified line shall be at least:
1) 3 m-at the voltage of the power line or the traction network up to 1 kV;
2) 15 m-at the voltage of a power line or a route network equal to or greater than 1 kV.
Chapter 8
Electrical installation
§ 180. [ Installation and electrical equipment] Installation and electrical equipment, subject to the provisions of the Regulation, separate provisions for energy supply, fire protection, environmental protection and health and safety at work, as well as requirements of Polish Standards for those installations and equipment, they shall ensure that:
1) the provision of electric energy with appropriate technical parameters to the receivers, according to the performance needs;
(2) protection against electrical shock, connection and atmospheric surges, fire, explosion and other damage;
3) protection against the emission of vibrations and noise above the permissible level and against harmful effects of electromagnetic field.
§ 180a. [ The permissible size of the value of the lighting unit power] In the public utility building referred to in the following table, the value of the power of the lighting unit shall not exceed the specified limit values:
| Building Type |
Maximum unit power value [ W/m 2 ] |
||
| Boost Class *) |
|||
| A |
B |
C |
|
| Offices |
15 |
20 |
25 |
| Schools |
15 |
20 |
25 |
| Hospitals |
15 |
25 |
35 |
| Restaurants |
10 |
25 |
35 |
| Sports and Recreation |
10 |
20 |
30 |
| Service-Services |
15 |
25 |
35 |
| *) The following criteria classes shall be established: A-fulfilment of the lighting criteria to a basic degree B-fulfilment of the lighting criteria extended to the extended level C-fulfilment of the lighting criteria to a full extent taking into account visual communication |
|||
§ 181. [ Evacuation Lighting] 1. A building in which the loss of voltage in the electricity supply network can cause the risk of life or health of humans, a serious threat of the environment, as well as significant material damage, the power supply should be at least two independent, self-switching electrical energy sources and equipping emergency lighting (backup or evacuation) with self-attached emergency lighting. In the high-rise building one of the power supply sources should be a generator of the generator.
2. Emergency backup illumination shall be used in rooms where, after the primary lighting disappearance, there is a need to continue operations in an unaltered manner or to safely terminate them, and the time of operation of the lighting system shall be adapted to the conditions resulting from the operations performed and the conditions prevailing in the room.
3. Emergency evacuation lighting shall be used:
1) indoors:
(a) cinematographers, theatres and philharmonics, and other spectacle rooms,
(b) auditoriums, conference rooms, reading rooms, entertainment venues and sports halls intended for more than 200 persons,
(c) exhibits in museums,
(d) with a net area of over 1000 m 2 in garages illuminated with artificial light only,
(e) with a net area of over 2000 m 2 in public utility buildings, collective residence buildings and in production and storage buildings;
2) on evacuation roads:
(a) from the premises referred to in point 1,
(b) illuminated with artificial light only,
(c) in hospitals and other buildings intended primarily for the use of persons with reduced mobility,
(d) in high and high public buildings of general interest and collective residence.
4. Emergency evacuation lighting shall not be required in spaces where emergency spare lighting meets the condition specified in the paragraph. 5 for emergency evacuation lighting.
5. Emergency evacuation lighting shall be operated for at least 1 hour from the primary illumination disappearance.
6. In a room which is used in the case of an off-base lighting, additional lighting shall be used, with a voltage not exceeding the touch voltage of the long term allowed, for the visibility of the obstacles resulting from the the layout of the building, the roads of general communication or the manner of its use, and illuminated signs indicating the directions of evacuation.
7. Emergency lighting shall be carried out in accordance with the Polish Standards concerning the requirements in this respect.
§ 182. [ Transformer station room] The premises of the transformer station may be placed in buildings of another purpose, if the conditions set out in § 96 are met and:
1) the horizontal and vertical distance from the premises intended for permanent residence of people of at least 2,8 m shall be preserved;
2) the walls and ceilings will constitute fire separation and will have protection against the passage of liquids and gases.
§ 183. [ Fire-Suppression Power Switch] 1. In electrical installations, the following shall be used:
1) connectors of the electrical installation of the building, allowing to disconnect from the mains power network and located in a place accessible to the supervision and service, and protected from damage, atmospheric influences, as well as the interference of unauthorised persons;
2. a separate protective and neutral cable, in the distribution and reception circuits;
3. differential-current protective devices supplementing the basic protection of the anti-fire protection and protection against fire resulting in a fault in the conditions of self-activation of the power supply;
4. overcurrent circuit breakers in reception circuits;
5) the principle of selectivity (selectivity) of collateral;
6) fire-off power switches;
7) main and local countervailable connections, connecting protective wires with conductive parts of other installations and building structures;
8) the principle of conducting the routes of electric conductors in straight lines, parallel to the edge of walls and ceilings;
(9) electric conductors, of copper, only of copper, if their section does not exceed 10 mm 2 ;
10) anti-surge protection equipment.
1a. The countervailable connections referred to in paragraph 1 In point 7, the following should be included:
1) a water supply installation made of metal wires;
2) metal parts of the sewage system;
3. installation of a water heater made of metal wires;
4) metal elements of gas installation;
5) metal elements of the cranes and machinery of the cranes;
6) metal elements of pipes and fireplace cartridges;
7) metal elements of pipes and devices for ventilation and air conditioning;
8) metal components of the telecommunication installation equipment housing.
2. Anti-fire power switch, the cut-off current for all circuits, except for supply circuits for installations and equipment, the operation of which is necessary during fire, shall be used in fire zones with a cubature Exceeding 1000 m 3 and/or containing zones at risk of explosion.
3. An anti-fire power switch shall be placed near the main entrance to the object or the connector and shall be marked accordingly.
4. The cut off of the fire current shall not cause the second source of electrical power, including the generating unit, to be attached automatically to the other source of electricity, except for the supply of emergency lighting, if it is present in the building.
§ 184. [ Uziomy electrical installations] 1. As a source of electrical installations, metal constructions of buildings, the reinforcement of foundations, and other metal elements placed in non-defended foundations constituting artificial foundations of the foundation should be used.
2. Use as a basis for the electrical wiring of the metal conductors of the water supply network shall be used, provided that the requirements of the Polish Norma concerning the ground and protective conductors are maintained and the approval of the unit operating the network is obtained.
3. Installation of lightning, referred to in § 53 par. 2, it should be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards for the protection of grape-back building facilities.
§ 185. [ Receiving installation] 1. The installation of the reception in the building and in the self-contained premises shall be equipped with an electric energy consumption measuring device, situated in a place easily accessible and protected from damage and interference of the unauthorised persons.
2. In the multi-family building, the meters of electric energy consumption should be placed outside the housing units, in the lockable cabinets.
§ 186. [ Conducting installation and deployment of electrical equipment] 1. The installation and arrangement of electrical equipment in the building shall ensure that there is no collision with other installations within the distance and their reciprocal location and shall take into account the conditions of § 164.
2. Main trains of electrical installations in a multi-family residential building, collective residential building and public utility building should be carried out outside of apartments and rooms dedicated to the stay of the people, in the separated channels or Installation windows, according to the Polish Standard on requirements in this regard.
§ 187. [ Wiring and electric cables] 1. Electrical cables and cables shall be carried out in such a way that they can be replaced without the need to violate the structure of the building.
2. Electrical wire conductors shall be allowed, provided they are covered with a plaster layer of at least 5 mm thickness.
3. Electrical and optical cables and optical cables, together with their attachments, hereinafter referred to as "cable assemblies", used in the systems of power supply and control of fire protection equipment, shall ensure the continuity of the supply of energy electrical or signal transmission for the time required to run and operate the device, subject to the paragraph. 7. Evaluation of cable assemblies in the scope of continuity of the supply of electricity or signal transmission, taking into account the type of substrate and the envisaged method of attachment to it, should be done in accordance with the conditions specified in the Polish Standard concerning the test of fire resistance.
4. Cable assemblies placed in rooms protected by solid water fire extinguishing devices shall be resistant to water impact. If wires and cables are arranged in fireproof cable ducts, then the requirement of resistance to water shall be considered to be met.
5. The electric cables and cables in the circuits of fire alarm, emergency lighting and communication devices shall have a PH class appropriate to the time required for the operation of these devices, in accordance with the requirements of the Polish Standards on the method of testing of flammability thin wires and cables without special protection used in the security circuits.
6. Cable assemblies shall be so designed and constructed that within the required period of time referred to in paragraph. 3 and 5, there was no interruption in the supply of electricity or signal transmission due to the impacts of building elements or equipment.
7. The time of ensuring the continuity of the supply of electricity or signal to the devices referred to in paragraph. 3, may be limited to 30 minutes, if the cable assemblies are located within the space protected with fixed self-active water extinguishing devices.
§ 188. [ Electricity reception circuit] 1. The receiving circuit of electrical installations in a multi-family building should be carried out within each apartment or service premises.
2. In the electrical installation of the apartment, the extracted circuits should be used: lighting, general-purpose plugs, plugs in the bathroom, plugs for reception facilities in the kitchen and the circuits to the receivers. requiring individual protection.
§ 189. [ Luminaires] 1. The premises in the apartment should be equipped with luminaires and in the necessary number of suitably arranged plugs.
2. The lighting installation in the rooms shall be capable of attaching the light sources by means of multiring fittings.
§ 190. [ Lighting and receivers in general communication spaces] In the building of the multi-family lighting and receivers in the premises of general and technical and economic communication, should be powered from administrative boards.
§ 191. (repealed).
§ 192. (repealed).
Chapter 8a
Telecommunication installation
§ 192a. [ Installation of the input bell-signalling and alarm-touchdown signalling] Accommodation in a multi-family residential building and separate housing in a collective residence building should be equipped with an installation of a bell-signalling input and an appropriate alarm-and-use alarm adapted to the needs of persons disability.
§ 192b. [ Telecommunication installation] The telecommunications installation referred to in § 56, hereinafter referred to as the "telecommunications installation", is installed and connected in terms of the technical and functional layout of its elements made in accordance with the Polish Standard for Planning and Execution installation inside buildings.
§ 192c. [ Telecommunication installation of the building housing and public buildings] The telecommunications installation of a collective residence building and a public utility building, subject to § 192d, shall in particular:
1) the telecommunication system of the building, understood as a string of casing elements enabling the introduction of cables to the building and their distribution in the building, including, among other things, cable passes, installation pipes, installation windows, troughs, Pipes and installation channels;
2) elements of the telecommunications infrastructure, including cables and wires with installation fittings and telecommunication equipment, starting from the switch located at the point of connection to the public telecommunication network or from the device the radio system to the exit of the subscription socket.
§ 192d. [ Telecommunication installation of the building intended for public education] The telecommunications installation of a public utility building intended for the public education, higher education, science and education, shall in particular:
1) the telecommunication system of the building, understood as a string of casing elements enabling the introduction of cables to the building and their distribution in the building, including, among other things, cable passes, installation pipes, installation windows, troughs, Pipes and installation channels;
2) fiber-optic telecommunications infrastructure of the building, including fibre optic cables, together with installation fittings and telecommunication devices, starting from the fiber switch located at the point of connection to the public network a telecommunication outlet to the outlet of the fibre-channel outlet located in any service premises.
§ 192e. [ Telecommunication installation of multi-family residential building] The telecommunication installation of a multi-family residential building shall in particular:
1) the telecommunication system of the building, understood as a string of casing elements enabling the introduction of cables to the building and their distribution in the building, including, among other things, cable passes, installation pipes, installation windows, troughs, Pipes and installation channels;
2) telecommunications housing boxes, located near the entrance door to the apartment, serving in particular the placement of the resulting cable endings, the placement of active or passive devices and, if necessary, of the electrical supply, as well as the distribution of the signal in the apartment;
3) fiber-optic telecommunications infrastructure of the building, including fiber-optic cables, together with installation fittings and telecommunication devices, starting from the fiber switch located at the point of connection to the public network Telecommunication endings for each telecommunication of the housing box;
4) an aerial collective installation for the reception of digital television and radiophone programmes distributed in a way of terrestrial spreading;
5) an aerial collective installation used for the reception of digital television and radiophone programmes distributed in a satellite-seeding manner;
6) cabling made of steam symmetric cables together with installation fittings and telecommunication equipment;
7) cabling made of coaxial cables with installation fittings and telecommunication devices from the cable switch located at the point of connection to the public telecommunications network for the termination of cables in the telecommunication housing;
8) mast situated on the roof of the building, along with the appropriate cable pass to the building, or in justified cases situated outside the building, adapted to the placement of the antenna of telecommunication providers providing services telecommunication by radio and the installation of the relevant installation elements referred to in points 4 and 5.
§ 192f. [ Telecommunication installation connection point with public telecommunication network] 1. The connection point of the telecommunications installation with the public telecommunication network (contact point) should:
1) be situated in a separate technical room, conforming to the technical conditions specified in § 96-98, on the first floor of the underground or the first floor of the stuffed building, and in the absence of possibility of providing such spaces-in the telecommunication cabinet equipped with the appropriate installation and electrical equipment;
2) provide switches equipped with functional stepping boxes, providing full reconnection and detachment capacity between the external telecommunication network and internal installations;
3) be adequately protected against the influence of unfavourable external factors and access of unauthorised persons;
4) be easily accessible to maintenance;
5) be labelled in a manner unambiguable stating the telecommunication entrepreneurs using this point;
6) enable assembly of telecommunication cabinets, devices and installation accessories;
7) provide the possibility of connecting telecommunication entrepreneurs to the building telecommunication installation, on the principle of equal access.
2. The operation of the telecommunications system and the deployment of telecommunication equipment in the building should ensure that there is no collision with other installations in terms of their mutual location and adverse impact and provide safety persons using the part of the joint building.
3. In the telecommunications installation, the protection devices must be applied against the surge, and when the installation can be exposed to the constriction-also in the protection device against transfusions, while the installation elements taken over the roof should be put in a zone protected by the lightning installation referred to in § 184 par. 3, or directly grounding in the absence of a lightning-reel installation. Over-roof aerial installations and longer continuous aerial installations in buildings (exceeding 10 m) should be protected by protective protectors from direct and indirect landings.
4. Telecommunication installation should:
1) enable the provision of telecommunications services, including data transmission services through broadband Internet access and television and radio broadcasting services, including high-resolution digital television programmes, by various providers of these services;
2) ensure compatibility and the possibility of connecting this installation to public telecommunication networks, while maintaining the principle of technological neutrality;
3) be executed in such a way as to guarantee the possibility of exchanging or installing an appropriate quantity of its elements, referred to in § 192c, § 192d and § 192e, as well as installation of additional telecommunications infrastructure, including antenna and cables, together with fittings installation and telecommunication equipment, without any violation of the structure of the building;
4. enable the connection and correct transmission of the telecommunication system signal of the radio system for the provision of telecommunications services.
5. In the telecommunications installation referred to in § 192d (2) and § 192e (3):
1) from the switch of the fibre located at the point of connection with the public telecommunication network as appropriate for the exit of the socket or termination of the cables, should be brought and completed at least two unanimous fiber optic fibres o the following parameters:
(a) the attenuation of the wavelength in the band 1310 nm-1625 nm of not more than 0,4 dB/km,
(b) the attenuation of a wavelength of 1550 nm not exceeding 0,25 dB/km,
(c) attenuation in the band 1383 +/-3 nm not more than 0,4 dB/km,
(d) the zero-wavelength of the chromatic dispersion of λ0 not less than 1300 nm and not more than 1324 nm,
(e) chromatic dispersion factor D not greater than 0,092 ps/nm 2 -km,
(f) the nominal diameter of the mode of the mode (for λ = 1310 nm) of 8,6 to 9,5 µ m with the tolerance of the mode of the modu +/-0,6 µ m,
(g) the cut-off wavelength for the fibre in the cable not more than 1260 nm,
(h) a suppressivity of 100 rolls of a diameter of 60 mm for a wavelength of 1625 nm not exceeding 0,1 dB;
2) use of SC/APC type single-use fibre connectors;
3. the quench of the optical track from the point of connection to the public telecommunication network to the exit of the socket or the termination of the cables shall not exceed 1,2 dB at a wavelength of 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
6. In the telecommunications installation referred to in § 192e (4), the following shall be used:
1. Coaxial cables of category RG-6 or higher, made in class A, comprising a double screen-aluminium foil and a tyre with a density of at least 77%, and a copper internal vein of a diameter of not less than one millimetre, and attenuation of each the tracks created from coaxial cables shall not exceed 12 dB at 860 MHz, or
(2) fibre-channel cables complying with the requirements set out in paragraph. 5, where the use of a single fibre-fibre fibre is permitted;
3) antenna set providing:
(a) frequency response from 87,5 to 108 MHz, 174 to 230 MHz and 470 to 862 MHz with correspondingly uniform frequency characteristics,
(b) a directional gain of not less than 14 dBi for the ranges 174 to 230 MHz and 470 to 862 MHz,
(c) Output impedance 75
4) amplifiers, multirange switches (multiswitches) and other active and passive fixtures for the reception of television and radiophone programmes distributed in the way of terrestrial spreading.
7. In the telecommunications installation referred to in § 192e (5), the following shall be used:
1) cabling in accordance with the requirements set out in the paragraph. 6 points 1 and 2;
(2) parabolic or offset antennas with a diameter of not less than 1,20 m, ensuring:
(a) a frequency response of 10,7 to 12,75 GHz, with appropriate frequency characteristics, respectively,
(b) the output impedance of 75, or the possibility of assembling converters with fibre optic output,
(c) the possibility of receiving a signal from at least two satellites,
(d) the possibility of receiving a signal of two orthogonal polarizations
-a single two-focal antenna can be used;
3) amplifiers, multirange switches (multiswitches) and other active and passive fixtures for the reception of television and radiophone programmes distributed in a satellite dispersal manner.
8. Cabling in the installations referred to in paragraph. 6 and 7, it should be brought from an antenna to telecommunication housing.
9. All active and passive devices in the television installation should be grounded and meet the requirement of shielding in Class A.
10. In the telecommunications installation referred to in § 192e (6), each telecommunication of the housing box shall have at least two or more symmetrical UTP cables of category 5 or higher and should be completed on an appropriate basis the connection fixtures so as to provide for the link or channel the minimum characteristics of Class D, one of which shall be intended for the purposes of the installation referred to in § 192a, or the like, and the other link shall be provided with the point of connection with the public telecommunications network should be intended for In particular, for the provision of telecommunications services, including broadband Internet access services.
11. In the telecommunications installation referred to in § 192e (7) the coaxial cables shall be used in accordance with the requirements set out in the paragraph. 6 point 1.
(12) The main routes of the telecommunications installation shall be carried out in addition to the dwellings and the premises and other premises the use of which may result in interruptions or interference with the signal being transmitted.
13. In the places available to the public, where the fibre optic end fibres are located, it shall be affixed, in a visible position, with an appropriate marking warning against invisible optical radiation.
Chapter 9
Lifting equipment
§ 193. [ Cranes] 1. In the buildings referred to in § 54 par. 1 and 2, the number and technical parameters of the cranes shall be determined taking into account the purpose of the building, its height and the number and type of users.
2. At least one of the cranes for general communication in the building with rooms earmarked for the stay of the people, and also in each separate vertical, separate part (segment) of such a building, should be adapted for the transport of furniture, patients on stretchers and people with disabilities.
2a. The cabin of the passenger lift available for disabled persons should be at least 1,1 m in width and length of 1.4 m, a handrail at a height of 0,9 m and a touchboard at a height from 0,8 m to 1,2 m at a distance of not less than 0,5 m from the corner Cabins with additional marking for blind people and voice information.
3. In the city centre of a replenishment of a multi-family residential building, which has no more than 3 flats accessible from the staircase on the floor, the installation of a non-conforming crane as defined in the paragraph is permitted. 2, in addition to the adaptation to the needs of disabled persons.
4. The lifts designed for rescue teams shall meet the requirements set out in § 253 and in the separate provisions for fire protection.
§ 194. [ Access to the crane] 1. The access to the crane should be provided from every floor of the utility. This does not apply to the condition of the superstructure or the adaptation of the attic to residential or other useful purposes.
2. The difference in the floor levels of the crane cabin, stopping on the floor of the utility, and the floor of this floor at the exit of the crane shall not be greater than 0,02 m.
§ 195. [ Distance between closed doors] The distance between the closed lift doors of the lift and the opposite wall or other bulkhead shall be at least as follows:
1) for passenger lifts-1,6 m;
2) for small cargo hoists-1,8 m;
3) for hospital and freight elevators-3 m.
§ 196. [ Electric hoists with electric drive] 1. The cranes with electric drive in a multi-family residential building and collective residence should be diverted from the walls and floor ceilings of the building.
2. In the buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, the installation of lifts with electric drive is allowed without the installation of cranes, provided that they are separated from the living rooms not intended for the permanent residence of the people and the use of the cranes Non-dispersed safety lever shaft against transmission of vibrations from road guides to the structure of the building so that the noise and vibration levels penetrating into the accommodation spaces do not exceed the values specified in the Polish Norms concerning the indoor sound level values and the impact assessment of vibration on people in buildings.
3. The requirement referred to in paragraph 1. 1, does not apply to hydraulic-powered cranes, small freight lifts, cranes with lower or side machinery, and of cranes with irreducible hoists, subject to § 96 (1) (a) of the 1, in particular for use in an irresistible lever shaft of the protection against the transmission of vibrations from the driving guides to the structure of the building so that the noise levels and vibrations permeating to the accommodation spaces do not exceed the value of the defined in the Polish Norms referred to in the mouth. 2.
§ 197. [ Crane propulsion systems] 1. The driving units of the crane shall be fitted in such a way as to prevent the vibrations from being moved to the structure of the building.
2. The situation of the machinery of the cranes next to the dwellings is prohibited. This does not apply to a condition of superstructure or of an adaptation of the attic to residential purposes, subject to the conditions laid down in Paragraph 96.
3. The crane machine should be equipped with devices to lift the components of the cranes.
§ 198. [ Lenses and cranes] 1. The cranes and cranes may be placed outside the buildings, provided that they have a minimum temperature of + 5 ° C.
2. Cranes of the crane shall be made of non-dusting materials or be protected by a non-atomized coating.
3. (repealed).
§ 199. [ Conducting under the cranes of the communication roads] Driving directly under the cranes of the communication roads and the situation of the premises for the stay of the people is prohibited. This does not apply when the strop under the shaft of the crane withholds the variable load of at least 5000 N/m 2 And under the driver's ride the counterweight is located a pillar based on a solid substrate or when the counterweight is equipped with grips.
§ 200. [ Crane in hospitals and social care buildings] In hospitals and social care buildings, each crane should be placed in a separate shaft. In other buildings, no more than 3 cranes can be placed in one glass.
§ 201. [ Equipment related to the work and maintenance of the crane] Only devices and hoses associated with the work and maintenance of the crane can be placed in crane speeds.
§ 202. [ Detailed Requirements] The specific requirements to be met by the machinery spaces, liners and windscreens of the cranes, including sewing and undersewing, shall be determined by the provisions on the technical supervision.
CHAPTER V
Safety of construction
§ 203. [ Buildings and equipment related to them] The buildings and facilities associated with them shall be designed and operated in such a way that the loads which may not operate in the course of construction and use do not lead to:
1) the destruction of all or part of the building;
2) movements and deformations of an unacceptable size;
3) damage to parts of buildings, connections or installed equipment as a result of significant movements of structural elements;
4) destruction as a result of an accident, to an extent disproportionate to its cause.
§ 204. [ Building Construction] 1. The structure of the building shall meet the conditions ensuring that the limits of the load capacity and the conditions of use for use in any of its components are not exceeded, and in the structure as a whole.
2. The carrier limits shall be considered to be exceeded, if the construction results in a threat to the safety of the people located in and near the building, as well as the destruction of the equipment or stored property.
3. The useful life limits for use shall be considered to be exceeded if the requirements of the use of the construction are not kept. This means that there can be no construction of the building in the building:
1) the local damage, including also the rifts which may negatively affect the usefulness of the utility, the durability and appearance of the structure, its parts, as well as the adjacent non-structural parts of the building;
(2) deformation or movement which is detrimental to the appearance of the structure and its suitability for use, including the operation of machinery and equipment, and damage to the non-structural parts of the building and the components of the finishing;
3) convulsions to people, or causing damage to the building, its equipment, and stored objects, and to restrict its use as intended.
4. The safety conditions of the structures referred to in paragraph. 1, shall be deemed to be satisfied if this design corresponds to the Polish Standards for the design and calculation of the structure.
5. The ascension of a building in the immediate vicinity of a construction object shall not cause risks to the safety of the users of this object or to reduce its usefulness for use.
6. Within the scope of the suitability for use of buildings designed in areas subject to the impact of mining operations, the requirement laid down in the paragraph shall be added. 4 does not apply to those deformation, damage and vibration of the structure that result from the effects of mining exploitation.
7. Public utility buildings with spaces designed for the presence of a significant number of persons, such as: spectacle, sports, exhibition, trade fair, commercial, railway station should be equipped, depending on the needs, in the fixture to the fixed control of parameters relevant to the safety of the structure, such as: displacement, deformation and stresses in the structure.
§ 205. [ Building protection of buildings] In areas subject to the impact of mining operations, the construction of buildings, appropriate to the state of emergency, should be used, resulting from the forecasted effects of mining operations, through which it is understood that the forced displacement and deformation and the vibrations of the ground.
§ 206. [ Technical experts] 1. In the case referred to in § 204 par. 5, the construction should be preceded by the technical expertise of an existing facility, stating its safety and suitability for use, taking into account the impacts caused by the eruption of the new building.
2. The extension, superstructure, rebuilding and conversion of the building should be preceded by the technical expertise of the state of the structure and building elements, taking into account the condition of the ground floor.
CHAPTER VI
Fire safety
Chapter 1
General principles
§ 207. [ Fire safety] 1. The building and its associated equipment shall be designed and constructed in such a way as to ensure in the event of fire:
1) the carrying capacity of the structure for the time resulting from the Regulation,
2) limitation of the spread of fire and smoke in the building,
3) limitation of the spread of fire to the neighboring buildings,
4) possibility of evacuation of people,
The safety of the rescue team is also taking into account safety.
2. Provisions of the regulation concerning fire safety, dimensions of stairs referred to in § 68 paragraph. 1 and 2, as well as the emergency lighting referred to in Paragraph 181, shall apply, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 2 (2) of the Treaty. 2 and 3a, also for existing existing buildings which, on the basis of separate provisions, are considered to be a life-threatening person.
§ 208. [ Fire safety requirements] 1. The provisions of this chapter determine the requirements for the fire safety of buildings or their parts, resulting from their intended use and manner of use, height or number of floors, as well as positions in relation to the level of the site and to other construction sites.
2. The application of the provisions of the Regulation requires that
1) the separate provisions for fire protection, specifying in particular:
(a) rules for assessing the risk of explosion and the designation of danger zones by explosion,
(b) conditions for the provision of buildings or parts thereof in signalling and alarm systems and fixed fire-extinguishing systems,
(c) the fire-supply fire rules,
(d) requirements for fire roads;
2) the requirements of the Polish Standards and conditions set out in Annex 3 to the Regulation, concerning, in particular, the rules for determining:
(a) the density of fire spaces and fire zones,
(b) classes of fire resistance of building elements,
(c) the openings of the openings of the openings,
(d) the functional characteristics of the fire ventilator equipment,
(e) the degree of fire spreading by building elements,
(f) reaction to the fire of construction products (materials),
(g) toxicity of the degradation products of materials.
§ 208a. [ The terms used in the Fire-Resilience Regulation] 1. The terms used in the Regulation: non-combustible, non-inflammable, difficult to inflammatory, easily inflammatory, non-dripping, self-shattering, intensively dissipating correspond to the class of reaction to fire according to Annex No. 3 to the Regulation.
2. The elements of the building specified in the regulation as non-flaming fire, poorly spreading fire or strongly spreading fire should satisfy, subject to the paragraph. 3, requirements in accordance with Annex 3 to the Regulation.
3. In the case of external walls of a building, including with insulation and outer linings or only with outer linings, by building elements:
1) Non-Proliferation of Fire-the elements of the fire non-fire space are understood both in the operation of the fire inside and outside the building,
2. poorly spreading fire-it is understood the elements of the building which on the one hand are poorly spreading fire, while at the action of fire on the other hand are poorly spreading fire or non-flaming fire,
3. Heavily spreading fire-means elements of a building which, in the operation of fire on the one hand, are classified as fire-spreading, regardless of the classification obtained by the fire from the other side
-for which the requirements for the operation of the fire inside the building are determined according to Annex 3 to the Regulation, and the fire from the outside of the building shall be determined in accordance with the Polish Standard on the method of testing the degree of spread fire through the walls.
4. The class E and fire integrity of doors or other closure of openings means E I1 class or E I2 class according to the Polish Standard for fire resistance testing, excluding installation Ventilation; for a lift door to a lift, it is permissible to determine fire resistance in accordance with the Polish Standard for the performance of the fire resistance test of the stop door.
5. The doors shall be the smoke-proof class Sm determined in accordance with the Polish Standard for a fire classification determined on the basis of fire resistance tests, excluding ventilation installation.
§ 209. [ Breakdown of buildings] 1. The buildings and parts of buildings which constitute separate fire zones within the meaning of § 226, on account of the use and use of the buildings, shall be divided into:
1) residential, collective and public housing characterized by a category of human risk, hereinafter referred to as the ZL;
2. production and warehousing, hereinafter referred to as PM;
(3) livestock (for livestock farming), hereinafter referred to as IN.
2. Buildings and parts of buildings which are separate fire zones, referred to as ZL, shall be classified as one or more of the following human risk categories:
1. ZL I-containing premises intended for the simultaneous presence of more than 50 persons who are not of their permanent users, and not primarily intended for use by people with reduced mobility;
2. ZL II-intended primarily for the use of people with reduced mobility, such as hospitals, nurseries, kindergartens, homes for the elderly;
3. ZL III-public utility, not eligible for ZL I and ZL II;
4) ZL IV-residential;
5) ZL V-resident collective, which is not eligible for ZL I and ZL II.
3. Requirements for fire safety of buildings and parts of buildings constituting separate fire zones, referred to as PM, also apply to garages, hydrophorers, boiler houses, district heating hubs, electric switchboards, stations transformer, telephone exchanges, and other similar purposes.
4. Requirements for fire safety of buildings and parts of buildings constituting separate fire zones, referred to as IN, shall also apply to such buildings in a risk building with a gross cubature not exceeding 1500 m 3 Like barns, buildings to store agricultural foetuses and farm buildings.
5. Fire zones included, due to the intended use and use, to more than one category of human risk, shall meet the requirements laid down for each of these categories.
§ 210. [ Parts of building separated by walls] The parts of the building separated by the walls of the fire separation in the vertical -from the foundation to the roof overcover-can be treated as separate buildings.
§ 211. [ Exemption of application of the Regulation] 1. The provisions of § 242 (1) 1, § 243 para. 1, § 245 (2) and § 256 (1) 3, in the category of category ZL V, does not apply to buildings and premises intended for accommodation of the detainees.
2. Provisions § 236 para. 4 and § 239 para. 2 points 3 and 4 do not apply to buildings located on the premises of penal sites and investigative detention facilities.
3. Provisions § 239 para. Paragraphs 3 and 4 do not apply to correctional facilities and juvenile shelters.
Chapter 2
Fire resistance of buildings
§ 212. [ Fire-resistance classes] 1. Five classes of fire resistance of buildings or parts thereof shall be determined, given in order from the highest to the lowest and marked letters: "A", "B", "C", "D" and "E", and characterized in § 216.
2. The required class of fire resistance for the building, classified as one ZL category, shall be defined in the following table:
| Building |
ZL I |
ZL II |
ZL III |
ZL IV |
ZL V |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
| low (N) |
'B' |
'B' |
'C' |
' D' |
'C' |
| diameters (SW) |
'B' |
'B' |
'B' |
'C' |
'B' |
| high (W) |
'B' |
'B' |
'B' |
'B' |
'B' |
| High altitude (WW) |
'A' |
'A' |
'A' |
'B' |
'A' |
3. A reduction of the required class of fire resistance in the buildings listed in the following table shall be tolerable to the level specified therein.
| Number of Filled Hopper |
ZL I |
ZL II |
ZL III |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
| 1 |
' D' |
' D' |
' D' |
| 2 *) |
'C' |
'C' |
' D' |
*) When the level of the steep above the ground floor is not more than 9 m above the ground level.
4. The required fire resistance class for the PM building and IN, subject to § 282, shall be determined by the following table:
| Maximum density Fire load fire zone in a building Q [ MJ/m 2 ] |
Building One Floor stuffed (no limit Altitude) |
Multistorey building |
|||
| low (N) |
diameters (SW) |
high (W) |
High altitude (WW) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
| Q ≤ 500 |
'E' |
' D' |
'C' |
'B' |
'B' |
| 500 < Q ≤ 1000 |
' D' |
' D' |
'C' |
'B' |
'B' |
| 1000 < Q ≤ 2000 |
'C' |
'C' |
'C' |
'B' |
'B' |
| 2000 < Q ≤ 4000 |
'B' |
'B' |
'B' |
✶ |
✶ |
| Q > 4000 |
'A' |
'A' |
'A' |
✶ |
✶ |
✶ -In accordance with § 228 (1) 1 may not perform such buildings.
5. If the underground part of the building is included in the ZL, the fire resistance class of the building shall be determined by assuming as the number of its floors or its height, respectively: the sum of the floor or the height of the underground and the filling part, with the result the arrangements shall not take into account those parts of the underground building which are separated by fire separation elements of at least R E and 120 of fire resistance class, as indicated under the table in § 216 paragraph. 1, and have direct outdoors.
6. In a multi-storey building, the floors of which are included in different categories of ZL or PM, fire resistance classes shall be determined for individual floors separately, according to the rules set out in the paragraph. 2-4.
7. The fire resistance class of a part of a building shall not be less than the fire resistance class of the part of the building above it, and it shall not be less than "C" for the underground part.
8. If there are production, storage or technical premises in the building, not functionally linked to the part of the building included in the ZL, these spaces should constitute a separate fire zone for which the class is separately established. the fire resistance, in accordance with the principles set out in paragraph 1. 4, subject to § 220.
9. Rooms in which fire water tanks or other fire extinguishing agents are placed, water pumps for fire-fighting systems, ventilation engine for fire purposes, and electrical switchgear, power supplies, necessary during the fire, installations and equipment, shall constitute a separate fire zone.
§ 213. [ Fire-resistance class requirements] The requirements for the fire resistance class of buildings specified in § 212 do not apply to buildings:
1) up to three floors of fillings inclusive:
(a) dwellings: single-family, homestead and individual recreation,
(b) residential and administrative holdings in forestry holdings;
2) slow standing up to two floors, including:
(a) gross cubature up to 1500 m 3 intended for tourism and leisure purposes,
(b) the economic development of a single family and at risk and in forestry holdings,
(c) gross cubature up to 1000 m 3 intended for the pursuit of a profession or a service and commercial activity, including a residential part;
3) slow-standing garages with a number of parking positions no more than 2.
§ 214. [ Reduction of fire resistance class] In buildings equipped with fixed self-active water-extinguishing systems, except for the buildings of ZL II and the multistorey buildings of high (W) and high-wall (WW) buildings, it is permissible to:
1) a reduction in the fire resistance class of a building by one in relation to the resulting § 212;
2) the acceptance of the class "E" fire resistance for the single-storey building.
§ 215. [ Acceptance of class E fire resistance] 1. The acceptance of class "E" of fire resistance for a single-storey PM building with a density of more than 500 MJ/m 2 , provided that:
1) all elements of the fire nonproliferation building;
2) self-active dedition devices in fire zones with a surface area exceeding 1000 m 2 .
2. The reduction of the fire resistance class of the building, in the cases mentioned in the mouth. 1 and in § 214, do not relieve from the maintenance of the required class of fire resistance of fire separation elements, as defined in § 232.
§ 216. [ Fire resistance classes of building elements] 1. Elements of the building, according to its fire resistance class, shall comply, subject to § 213 and § 237 paragraph. 9, at least the requirements set out in the following table:
| Class resiliency fire building |
Fire resistance class of building elements 5) *) |
|||||
| main load-bearing structure |
roof structure |
strop 1) |
external wall 1), 2) |
internal wall 1) |
roof cover 3) |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
| 'A' |
R 240 |
R 30 |
R E I 120 |
E I 120 (o↔i) |
E I 60 |
R E 30 |
| 'B' |
R 120 |
R 30 |
R E I 60 |
E I 60 (o↔i) |
E I 30 4) |
R E 30 |
| 'C' |
R 60 |
R 15 |
R E I 60 |
E I 30 (o↔i) |
E I 15 4) |
R E 15 |
| ' D' |
R 30 |
(-) |
R E I 30 |
E I 30 (o↔i) |
(-) |
(-) |
| 'E' |
(-) |
(-) |
(-) |
(-) |
(-) |
(-) |
*) Subject to Paragraph 219 (2) of the 1.
Markings in Table:
R-fire load capacity (in minutes), determined in accordance with the Polish Norm concerning the rules for determining the fire resistance classes of building elements,
E-fire tightness (in minutes), specified jw.,
I-fire insulation (in minutes), specified jw.,
(-)-no requirements are made.
1) If the bulkhead is part of the main load-bearing structure, it shall also comply with the fire load capacity (R) criteria according to the requirements of the wheel. 2 and 3 for a given fire resistance class of the building.
2) The fire integrity class applies to the interfitness belt along with the connection to the ceiling.
3) The requirements do not apply to roof panels, skylights, lucarns and windows (subject to § 218), if the openings in the roof area do not occupy more than 20% of its surface; they do not apply to the building in which the highest level is located A ceiling or other bulkhead meeting the criteria specified in the kol. 4.
4) For walls, class E and 60 shall be required for the compartments of the sip, and for doors of class E and 30 class of silt.
5) The fire integrity class applies to the components together with the seals of connectors and the diffusions.
2. The elements of the building referred to in paragraph. 1, shall be non-fire-firing, where poorly spreading fire may be applied:
1) elements of a building with one filling storey ZL IV and PM, with maximum fire density of fire zone up to 500 MJ/m 2 ;
2) internal and external walls and roof structure elements and its overcovering in the PM building low with maximum fire density density of the fire zone up to 1000 MJ/m 2 ;
3) external walls in the low building ZL IV.
3. The use of Class D external walls with Class E core due to reaction to fire, if the inner lining is non-flammable, and the wall is non-fire-firing at fire from the facade shall be permitted in the PM building.
4. The use of Class D internal walls in the PM building due to reaction to fire is allowed.
5. In the walls of the external building ZL II is allowed, subject to the paragraph. 8, the application of the thermal insulation of the combustor, if it weakens from the inside of the lining is non-flammable and has a fire resistance class of at least:
1) in the fire-resistance class building "B"-E I 60;
2) in the building fire resistance class "C" and "D"-E I 30.
6. The use of smoke claps with flammable materials in rooftops and ceilings is allowed.
7. A level-of-mezzanine subsidiary, intended for use by more than 10 persons and its superstructure, shall comply with the requirements of the fire resistance class of the building, but not less than for the class. "D", subject to § 214.
8. In the building, at a height of more than 25 m from the ground level, facade lining and its mechanical attachment, as well as heat insulation of the outer wall, should be made of non-combustble materials.
9. The warming of the external wall of a residential building, erected before 1 April 1995, up to and including 11 floors, shall be allowed, using a self-stunning sintered polystyrene, in such a way as to ensure the non-proliferation of fire.
§ 217. [ V fire resistance class of internal partitions] 1. In buildings ZL IV and ZL V class of fire resistance of internal partitions separating the dwellings or self-contained living spaces from the roads of general communication and from other apartments and self-contained living spaces, subject to § (a) 1, shall be at least:
1) for the walls in the building:
(a) low and medium-size-E I 30,
(b) high and high-wall-E I 60;
2) for strops in a building containing 2 apartments-R E I 30.
2. The fire resistance class of the wall separating the segments of single-family buildings of ZL IV: twin, serial or atrial buildings should be at least-R E I 60.
3. In apartments and in self-contained living spaces, the execution of internal walls of non-flammable fire, without the requirement in § 216 (2), is permitted. 1 in column 6 of the fire-resistance class table.
§ 218. [ Elements of the structure and roof cover of the lower building] 1. The covering of the roof of the lower house, situated closer than 8 m or adjacent to the wall with openings of the higher building, except in the cases mentioned in § 273 paragraph. 1, in a belt with a width of 8 m from this wall should be non-flaming fire and in the belt of this:
1) the design of the roof should have a fire resistance class at least R 30;
(2) the roof cover shall have a fire integrity class R E 30.
2. The conditions set out in the paragraph. 1 shall not apply if the closest to the hole in the wall of a higher building is less than 10 m from the roof of the lower building, and the density of the fire load in the lower building does not exceed 2000 MJ/m 2 .
3. The provisions of the paragraph. 1 and 2 shall also apply to the lower part of the building if that part is a separate fire zone.
4. The departure of ventilation ducts and exhaust gas from the gas appliances and pipes ventilating the sewage pipes in the part of the roof or the ceiling of the sub-building referred to in paragraph 1 shall be allowed. 1.
§ 219. [ Building overcover] 1. Roof roof cover of more than 1000 m 2 shall be fire non-firing, and the combustible thermal insulation shall be separated from the inside of the building with a fire resistance class of not less than R E 15.
2. In buildings ZL III, ZL IV and ZL V the usable attic intended for residential or office purposes should be separated from the combustible structure and the combustible roof over the fire-resistance class:
1) in a low building-E I 30;
2) in a semi-circular and high building-E I 60.
§ 220. [ Internal walls and ceilings separating boiler] 1. Internal walls and ceilings of boiler secretions, solid fuel depots, slag and fuel oil warehouses, as well as the closure of openings in these elements, shall have a fire resistance class not less than that specified in the table:
| Room Type |
Fire resistance class |
||
| internal walls |
Strops |
doors or other closures |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
| Boiler room with solid fuel boilers, with a combined heat output of more than 25 kW |
E I 60 |
R E I 60 |
E I 30 |
| Boiler room with boilers for fuel oil, with a combined heat output of more than 30 kW |
E I 60 |
R E I 60 |
E I 30 |
| Boiler room with boilers for gas fuel, with a total heat output exceeding 30 kW: -in a low building (N) and semi-averages (SW) -in high building (W) and high-wall (WW) |
E I 60 |
R E I 60 |
E I 30 |
| E I 120 |
R E I 120 |
E I 60 |
|
| Composition of solid fuel and slag |
E I 120 *) |
R E I 120 *) |
E I 60 *) |
| Fuel oil warehouse |
E I 120 |
R E I 120 |
E I 60 |
*) The requirement does not apply to single-family dwellings, residential buildings in the construction site and individual recreation buildings.
2. For the premises referred to in paragraph. 1, the fire integrity class of external walls shall be taken in accordance with § 216.
3. No requirements for fire resistance class for external boiler partitions with gas fuel boilers, located above the roof of the building, shall not be required, subject to the condition that these bulkheads shall be made of non-combustble materials.
§ 221. [ Application of light roof] 1. A light roof, made of at least flammable materials, weighing not more than 75 kg/m, shall be used over the explosive room at the risk of explosion. 2 The cast, counting without elements of the roof supporting structure, such as substrings, beams and beams.
2. Paragraph Recipe 1 does not apply to the room in which the total surface of the offloading (explosion) devices, such as the diapses, flaps and holes glazed by the ordinary glass, is greater than 0,065 m 2 /m 3 room cubature.
3. A wall separating the room at risk of explosion from other rooms should be resistant to a ground floor of 15 kN/m 2 (15 kPa).
§ 222. [ Room at risk of explosion] 1. An explosion at risk of explosion should be placed on the highest floor of the building. This requirement does not apply to buildings in closed areas.
2. Other accommodation of the premises referred to in paragraph 2 shall be authorised. 1, subject to the application of appropriate installations and anti-explosive devices, agreed with the appropriate commandant of the State Fire Service.
§ 223. [ Trans-floor belts] 1. In the walls of the external multi-storey building, subject to § 224, shall be inter-floor belts with a height of at least 0,8 m.
2. As an equivalent solution, horizontal separations shall be considered in the form of dishes, gamides and balconies with an outlet of at least 0,5 m or other horizontal and vertical separations of the sum of the exuperation and vertical dimension of at least 0,8 m.
3. The horizontal elements mentioned in the paragraph. 2, should have the fire resistance class required in relation to the exterior walls of the building and be made of non-combustble materials.
4. The conditions set out in the paragraph. 1 and 2 do not apply to the walls of the hall and the roads of general communication.
§ 224. [ Height of the inter-floor belt] 1. In the walls of the external multi-storey building above the fire zone PM, with a density of fire load exceeding 1000 MJ/m 2 , the height of the inter-floor belt shall be at least 1,2 m.
2. A peer-to-peer solution shall be considered to be horizontal separation in the form of bars, gamides and balconies with an outlet of at least 0,8 m or other horizontal and vertical separations with a total vertical dimension and a range of at least 1.2 m, subject to conditions referred to in § 223 par. 3.
§ 225. [ Elements of façade linings] The facade lining elements shall be fitted to the structure of the building in such a way as to prevent them from being waste in the event of a fire in less than that resulting from the required class of fire resistance to the external wall, as defined in § 216 (1). 1, as appropriate to the fire resistance class of the building in which they are attached.
Chapter 3
Fire zones and fire separation
§ 226. [ Fire zones] 1. A fire zone is a building or a part of it separated from other buildings or other parts of the building blocks of fire separation, referred to in § 232 section. 4, or the free area of land not less than the permissible distances from other buildings, as defined in § 271 (1) (a) (a) of the 1-7.
2. The part of the building referred to in paragraph. 1, it is also its floor, if the staircases and the crane windows in this building meet at least the requirements set out in § 256 paragraph. 2 for staircases.
3. The area of the fire zone is calculated as the internal surface of the building or its parts, with the surface of the mezzanine included.
§ 227. [ Acceptable areas for ZL fire zones] 1. The permissible surfaces of ZL fire zones are defined in the following table:
| Category threats people |
Permissible area of the fire zone in m 2 |
|||
| in a building with one storey floor (without a limit) |
in a multi-storey building |
|||
| Low (N) |
diamete (SW) |
high and high (W) i (WW) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
| ZL I, ZL III, ZL IV, ZL V |
10,000 |
8000 |
5000 |
2500 |
| ZL II |
8000 |
5000 |
3500 |
2000 |
2. The permitting surface of the ZL fire zone, covering the underground part of the building, shall not exceed 50% of the permissible area of the fire zone of the same category of danger of the people referred to in the paragraph. 1 for the first hopeful floor of this building.
3. Reduction of the permissible surface area of the fire zone referred to in paragraph. 2, not applicable when evacuation exits from the underground storey lead directly to the outside of the building.
4. The surface area of the fire zones referred to in paragraph shall be extended. 1, with the exception of fire zones in multi-storey high buildings (W) and high-wall (WW) buildings, provided that:
1. fixed sprinkler fire extinguishing devices-by 100%;
2) self-active smoke detectors operated by the smoke detection system by 100%.
At the same time, the use of the devices mentioned in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be permitted to increase the surface area of the fire zones by 200%.
5. From the fire zone of ZL II with an area exceeding 750 m 2 in a multi-storey building, the possibility of evacuation of people to another fire zone on the same floor should be provided.
§ 228. [ Acceptable areas of PM fire zones] 1. The permissible surfaces of PM fire zones, with the exception of garages, shall be defined in the following table:
| Maximum fire density of fire zone in building Q [ MJ/m 2 ] |
Building with one storey floor (no height limitation) |
Permissible area of the fire zone in m 2 |
||
| in a building with one Superfloor (no limit) |
in a multi-storey building |
|||
| low and diametsid (N) i (SW) |
high and high-wall (W) i (WW) |
|||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
| Fire zones with an endangered room |
Q > 4000 |
1000 |
✶ |
✶ |
| 2000 < Q ≤ 4000 |
2000 |
✶ |
✶ |
|
| 1000 < Q ≤ 2000 |
4000 |
1000 |
✶ |
|
| 500 < Q ≤ 1000 |
6000 |
2000 |
500 |
|
| Q ≤ 500 |
8000 |
3000 |
1000 |
|
| Other fire zones |
Q > 4000 |
2000 |
1000 |
✶ |
| 2000 < Q ≤ 4000 |
4000 |
2000 |
✶ |
|
| 1000 < Q ≤ 2000 |
8000 |
4000 |
1000 |
|
| 500 < Q ≤ 1000 |
15,000 |
8000 |
2500 |
|
| Q ≤ 500 |
20,000 |
10,000 |
5000 |
|
✶ No such cases are allowed.
2. The fire zones referred to in paragraph. 1, in the underground part of buildings should not exceed 50% of the area specified in the table.
§ 229. [ Enlargement of fire zones] 1. The surface area of the fire zones referred to in § 228 shall be allowed to increase, provided that the area of fire zones is protected:
1. fixed self-fire-extinguishing systems, by 100%;
2. Self-defiant self-active devices by 50%.
2. While applying the devices mentioned in the mouth. 1 shall be permitted to increase the fire zones by 150%.
§ 230. [ Increase in the size of fire zones PM] 1. In the single-storey building or on the last floor of a multi-storey building the size of the PM fire zones, with the exception of garages, can be increased by 100% if the building does not contain the room at risk of explosion and is made of non-flaming elements and the use of self-active oddizing devices.
2. In the building of the single-storey size of fire zones, the PM, with the exception of the garage, is not limited, subject to the application of fixed self-active water extinguishing devices and self-active delicating devices.
§ 231. [ Allowed area of fire zones IN] 1. The permissible surfaces of the IN-fire zones shall be as follows:
| Building Floor Number |
Permissible area of the fire zone in m 2 |
|
| in bedding |
for non-bedding |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| One |
5000 |
is not limited |
| Two |
2500 |
5000 |
| Above two |
1000 |
2500 |
2. In the case of application in the building of walls strongly spreading fire, the fire zone should be reduced to 25% of the value given in the paragraph. 1, and in the case of a single-storey building intended for non-bedding breeding, the zone is limited to 5000 m 2 .
§ 232. [ Walls and strops] 1. Walls and ceilings constituting elements of the fire separation shall be made of non-combustible materials and their present openings-encapsulated or closed with fire doors or other, enclosed in fire doors fire closure.
2. In the wall of the fire separation, the total area of the openings referred to in the paragraph. 1, should not exceed 15% of the surface of the wall, and in the fire separation ceiling-0,5% of the floor area.
3. Fire vestibule shall have a horizontal projection of not less than 1,4 × 1,4 m, walls and ceilings, as well as shields or housings of electric conductors and cables, except those used in the vestibule, with fire resistance class. At least E and 60 made of non-combustible materials and be closed doors and ventilated at least gravitationally, subject to § 246 paragraph. 2 and 3.
4. The required fire resistance class of fire separation elements and the closure of the openings contained in them shall be determined by the following table:
| Class resiliency fire building |
Fire resistance class |
||||
| fire separation elements |
fire doors or other fire closures |
doors with fire-proof vestibule |
|||
| walls and ceilings, excluding strops in ZL |
ZL strops |
on the corridor and into the room |
to the staircase * ) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
| 'A' |
R E I 240 |
R E I 120 |
E I 120 |
E I 60 |
E 60 |
| "B" and "C" |
R E I 120 |
R E I 60 |
E I 60 |
E I 30 |
E 30 |
| "D" and "E" |
R E I 60 |
R E I 30 |
E I 30 |
E I 15 |
E 15 |
*) It is permissible to embed these doors in the wall with the fire resistance class specified for the door in a coll. 6, which is located between the vestibule and the staircase.
5. The fire resistance class of fire separation elements and the closure of the openings in the buildings referred to in § 213 shall be not less than that specified in the paragraph. 4 for buildings with fire resistance class "D" and "E".
6. In the wall of the fire separation, the filling of the openings of the light-permeable material, such as the lux, glass brick or other glazing, is permitted if the surface of the filled openings does not exceed 10% of the surface of the wall, at The fire integrity class of fillings should not be less than:
| Required fire resistance class of fire separation wall |
Fire resistance class of the wall opening |
|
| as an enclosure of the evacuation road |
other |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| R E I 240 |
E I 120 |
E 120 |
| R E I 120 |
E I 60 |
E 60 |
| R E I 60 |
E I 30 |
E 30 |
7. The use in fire zones of the PM will be permitted in the wall of the fire separation, to carry out technological devices, protected in a manner equivalent to that required for this wall of the fire doors in terms of the possibility of being moved by that opening of fire or smoke, in the case of fire.
§ 233. [ Use of fire curtain] 1. The use of fire curtain shall be required to separate:
1) the audience, with a number of places exceeding 600, from the theatre scene with an internal surface exceeding 150 m 2 or with a gross cubature exceeding 1200 m 3 ;
2) of the stage pocket, with a surface exceeding 100 m 2 , from theatrical stage with an inner surface exceeding 300 m 2 or of a gross cubature exceeding 6000 m 3 .
2. The prices referred to in paragraph 1, they shall be equipped with automatic smoke detectors actuated by smoke detection system.
§ 234. [ Installation Pass-over] 1. Installation switches in the fire separation elements shall have the fire resistance class (E I) required for these elements.
2. The non-installation of the passes referred to in paragraph shall be allowed. 1, for single pipes of water, sewage and heating installations, introduced by the walls and ceilings to the hygienic premises.
3. Installation compartments with a diameter of more than 0,04 m in the walls and ceilings of enclosed spaces, for which the required fire resistance class is not lower than E I 60 or R E I 60, and not components of fire separation, shall have the fire integrity class (E I) of the walls and ceilings of this room.
4. The passage of the installation by the external walls of the building, located below the level of the site, should be protected against the possibility of gas penetration into the interior of the building.
§ 235. [ Fire separation wall] 1. The wall of the fire separation shall be erected on its own foundation or on the ceiling, based on the superstructure of the fire-resistance class not lower than the fire resistance of this wall.
2. The fire separation wall shall be eject for at least 0,3 m outside the wall of the external wall of the building or at the entire height of the external wall to apply a vertical strip of non-flammable material of at least 2 m width and resistance class Fireplace E I 60.
3. In the building with a roof cover spreading fire, the fire separation wall shall be carried out above the roof covering at least 0,3 m or applied along the walls of a strip of non-combustible material with a width of at least 1 m and Fire resistance class E and 60, directly under cover; the cover of this width shall be non-fire-firing.
4. In the building, with the exception of the one-sided construction, the roof of which are skylights or smoke flaps, the walls of the fire separation situated from them at a horizontal distance of less than 5 m, should be displaced above the upper edge of the building a height of at least 0,3 m, and this requirement does not apply to non-opened fireflies having a fire resistance class at least E 30.
Chapter 4
Escape routes
§ 236. [ Evacuation Routes] 1. From premises intended to stay people shall be provided with the possibility of evacuation to a safe place outside the building or to a neighbouring fire zone, either directly or by means of general communication, hereinafter referred to as "escape routes".
2. From the fire zone referred to in paragraph 1, there should be an exit directly outside the building or by another fire zone, subject to § 227 ust. 5.
3. Exodus from the rooms to escape routes should be closed doors.
4. A door which is an escape exit from a building intended for more than 50 people should open outside. This requirement does not apply to a building that is entered in the register of monuments.
5. In the evacuation exit of the building it is permissible to use sliding doors complying with the requirements specified in § 240. 4.
6. When determining the required width and number of transitions, exits and escape routes in a building in which the maximum number of their users is not clearly apparent from the intended use and use of the premises, this number is to be taken in with regard to the areas of such premises, for:
1) conference rooms, dining and entertainment venues, waiting rooms, holi, skylights, etc. -1 m 2 /person;
2) commercial and service premises-4 m 2 /person;
3) administrative and office premises-5 m 2 /person;
4) archives, libraries, etc. -7 m 2 /person;
5) warehouses-30 m 2 /person.
§ 237. [ Evacuation Transition] 1. In the premises, from the farthest place where a person may be present, to the escape exit to the escape route or to another fire zone or to the outside of the building, a passage should be provided, hereinafter referred to as the "evacuation passage", with a length not exceeding:
1) in fire zones ZL-40 m;
2) in fire zones of PM with a density of more than 500 MJ/m 2 in a building with more than one floor of the filling-75 m;
3. in PM fire zones, with a fire load not exceeding 500 MJ/m 2 , in a building with more than one filing floor and in the fire zones of the PM in a building with one floor of the filth, regardless of the size of the fire load-100 m.
2. In the room at risk of explosion, the length of the escape passage referred to in paragraph shall be. 1 points 2 and 3, shall not exceed 40 m.
3. An explosion of an evacuation passage from another room shall be permitted by the room if these spaces are functionally related.
4. If the intended purpose of the room does not clearly show the use of the room, the design length of the escape passage shall not exceed 80% of the length specified in the paragraph. 1 and 2.
5. In rooms with a height exceeding 5 m, the length of the passings referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, may be increased by 25%.
6. The long passes referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, may be increased provided that:
1) fixed self-active water extinguishing systems-by 50%;
2) self-active smoke detectors operated by the smoke detection system by 50%.
7. The magnification referred to in paragraph 1. Paragraphs 5 and 6, paragraphs 1 and 2, are summed up.
8. The transition referred to in paragraph 1, should not lead to more than three rooms in total.
9. The partition walls separating the spaces, for which the length of the escape passage is defined, shall not apply to the requirement laid down in § 216. 1.
10. The width of the evacuation passage in the space dedicated to the stay of the people, subject to § 261, shall be calculated in proportion to the number of persons to whom the evacuation is served, taking at least 0.6 m per 100 persons, but not less than 0,9 m, and in the case of a transition used to evacuate up to 3 persons-not less than 0,8 m.
§ 238. [ Number of evacuation exits] The room shall have at least two evacuation exits separated by at least 5 m in cases where:
1) is intended for the simultaneous presence of more than 50 people in it, and in the ZL II fire zone-more than 30 persons;
2) is located in the ZL fire zone, and its surface exceeds 300 m 2 ;
3) is located in the fire zone PM with a fire load density exceeding 500 MJ/m 2 , and its surface area exceeds 300 m 2 ;
4) is located in the fire zone PM with a density of fire up to 500 MJ/m 2 , and its surface area exceeds 1000 m 2 ;
5) is at risk of explosion, and its surface exceeds 100 m 2 .
§ 239. [ Door] 1. The total width of the door in the light, which is the escape exits of the room, shall be calculated in proportion to the number of persons who may be present at the same time, taking at least 0,6 m in width per 100 persons, the smallest of which shall be the width of the door in the light of the path shall be 0,9 m, and in the case of a door for evacuation to 3 persons-0,8 m.
2. The door to be evacuated shall be opened outside the premises:
1) at risk of explosion;
2) to which unexpected losses of explosive mixtures or poisonous substances, suffocating or other, likely to hinder the evacuation, are possible;
3) intended for the simultaneous presence of more than 50 persons;
4) intended for more than 6 persons with reduced mobility.
3. evacuation exits from an explosion-at-fire enclosure shall be carried out by fire-vestibule, which shall comply with the requirements of § 232.
4. The width of the door that is the escape exit from the building, subject to the paragraph. 1, as well as the width of the door on the escape route from the stairway leading to the outside of the building or to another fire zone, shall be not less than the width of the staircase running, determined in accordance with § 68 (1). 1 and 2.
5. The width of the door in the light of the escape route, not mentioned in the mouth. 4, be calculated in proportion to the number of persons to whom the evacuation is intended, taking at least 0,6 m of width per 100 persons, with the smallest width of the doors being 0,9 m in the light of the frames.
6. The height of the doors referred to in paragraph. 1, 4 and 5, shall comply with the requirements of § 62 (1). 1.
§ 240. [ Types of door] 1. Multi-leaf doors, being evacuated from the room and by evacuation, shall have at least one non-bloated door wing of a width of not less than 0,9 m.
2. The width of the wing of the shuttle door, which is the escape exit from the room and by the escape route, shall be at least for a single-leaf door-0,9 m, and for a twine door-0,6 m, with both wings of the door Two curves must have the same width.
3. Application shall be prohibited for the purpose of evacuation of revolving doors and lifting doors.
4. The sliding doors may be used as exits for escape routes, as well as being used on evacuation roads, if they are intended not only for evacuation purposes, and their construction ensures:
1) automatic and manual opening without possibility of blocking them;
2. the automatic dissipating of them and shall remain in the open position as a result of the failure of the smoke detection system to fire the fire zone, to evacuate from which the door is intended, and in the event of a failure of the door.
5. In the gates and walls sliding on the evacuation roads, the door shall be opened manually or in the immediate vicinity of these gates and walls shall be placed and clearly marked the door intended for the purpose of evacuation.
6. The doors, gates and other closing of the openings with the required fire resistance or smoke resistance class shall be provided with devices ensuring the automatic closure of the opening in the event of fire. It shall also be possible to manually open the door for evacuation.
7. A door which is an escape exit from a room where more than 300 persons may be present, and a door on the escape route from that room shall be equipped with an anti-panic device.
§ 241. [ Restoration of horizontal evacuation roads] 1. The construction of horizontal evacuation roads shall have the fire resistance class required for internal walls, but not less than E and 15, taking into account § 217. The requirement of the fire resistance class for the enclosure of horizontal evacuation roads shall not apply to the cover of the pedestrian-passage covered by the passage referred to in § 247 (1). 2.
2. In the internal walls, constituting an enclosure of escape routes in fire zones ZL III and PM, it is permissible to place the unopened illuminators above 2 m from the floor level, if the adjacent spaces are not at risk of explosion and if the density of the fire in these spaces does not exceed 1000 MJ/m 2 .
3. In the walls of the external buildings, where the gallery is located, which is the only escape route, it is possible to put on a light above 2 m from the floor of this gallery.
§ 242. [ Width of horizontal evacuation roads] 1. The width of the horizontal evacuation roads shall be calculated in proportion to the number of persons who can stay at the same time on a given floor of the building, taking at least 0.6 m per 100 persons, but not less than 1,4 m.
2. A reduction in the width of the horizontal escape route to 1,2 m shall be allowed, if it is intended to evacuate no more than 20 persons.
3. The height of the escape route shall be at least 2,2 m and the height of the local reduction of 2 m, with the length of the reduced section of the road must not be greater than 1,5 m.
4. The wings of the door, which are an exit to the escape route, shall not, after their complete opening, reduce the required width of the road.
§ 243. [ corridors constituting an evacuation route] 1. The bodies constituting the escape route in the ZL fire zones shall be divided into sections of not more than 50 m when using a bulkheads with smoke-tight doors or other technical devices preventing the spread of smoke.
2. The requirement referred to in paragraph 2. 1, does not apply to corridors to which technical-building solutions are used to prevent smoke.
3. The partitions referred to in paragraph. 1, over suspended ceilings and under floors raised above the level of the ceiling or floor, should be made of non-combustble materials.
§ 244. [ Application of fan stair] 1. On the evacuation roads is prohibited use:
1) the welders with degrees;
2) stairs with treatment rates, if the stairs are the only evacuation route.
2. The use of a fan staircase is permitted on the evacuation roads, provided that the minimum width of the steps specified in § 69 (1) is maintained. 6.
3. In evacuation roads where the use of slipways or feet capable of overcoming the difference of levels should be clearly marked.
§ 245. [ Staircase] In buildings:
1) low (N), which contains a fire zone of ZL II,
2. medium size (SW), containing fire zone ZL I, ZL II, ZL III or ZL V,
3) low (N) and semi-diameter (SW), containing fire zone PM with a fire density of more than 500 MJ/m 2 or a room at risk of explosion,
The stairways shall be enclosed and closed by doors and fitted with smoke-preventing or smoke-removing devices.
§ 246. [ Staircases and fire arches] 1. In the high (W) and high-wall (WW) building, there shall be at least two staircases enclosed and separated from the horizontal roads of general communication and the rooms of the fire-vestibule, corresponding to the requirements of § 232. Additional vertical lines of general communication which do not meet these requirements may be permitted if they combine floors within a single fire zone.
2. staircases and fire vestibules, constituting the escape route in the high building (W) for fire zones other than ZL IV and PM and in the high altitude building (WW), shall be equipped with devices to prevent their smoke.
3. Stair cages and fire vestibules, constituting the escape route in the high building (W) for the fire zone PM, shall be equipped with anti-smoke devices or self-active dissiding devices launched by means of the system smoke detecs.
4. In a high building (W) with no fire zone of the ZL II, only one staircase may be used if the area of the horizontal projection of the building does not exceed 750 m 2 .
5. In the high (W) and high-wall (WW) building (WW), the execution of staircases is permitted only for fire zones ZL IV, without the vestibule separating them from the horizontal channels of general communication, if:
1. each apartment or room is separated from the horizontal road of communication of the general door with a fire resistance class of at least E and 30;
2. stairwells shall be closed with smoke doors;
3. staircases shall be equipped with anti-smoke devices or self-active smoke detectors operated by smoke detection systems.
6. In the semi-circular building (SW) and above, in the ZL V fire zone, the doors of the rooms, except for the hygienic, leading to the road of general communication, should have a fire resistance class at least E and 30.
§ 247. [ Smoke protection] 1. In the building high (W) and altimeter (WW), in fire zones other than ZL IV, the technical construction solutions to prevent the smoke of the horizontal evacuation roads shall be used.
2. In a pedestrian area (passenger), to which commercial and service premises are adjacent, and in a covered internal courtyard, technical solutions to prevent the smoke of the evacuation routes shall be used.
3. In the underground floor of the building, where a room for more than 100 persons is located, and an underground structure with such a room, it is necessary to use the technical and construction solutions to ensure that smoke is removed from this room and from the evacuation roads.
§ 248. [ Internal stairs] Indoor stairs in housing in a multi-family building and in a single-family building, a homestead and individual recreation, as well as a temporary building not intended for spectacle or other gatherings of people, may not meet the requirements Evacuation drogs.
§ 249. [ Internal walls and ceilings] 1. The interior walls and ceilings constituting the staircase or slipway enclosure shall have a fire resistance class determined in accordance with § 216, as for the building's ceilings.
2. The requirement referred to in paragraph 2. 1, does not apply to vertical roads of general communication which only occur within a single fire zone, subject to § 256 (1). 2.
3. The runs and spores of stairs and slipways for evacuation shall be made of non-combustible materials and shall have a class of fire resistance at least:
1. in buildings with fire resistance class "A", "B" and "C"-R 60;
2) in buildings with fire resistance class "D" and "E"-R 30.
4. Requirement of fire resistance class referred to in paragraph. 3, not applicable to staircases separated into each storey of fire-vestibules and staircases on the mezzanine in the room where it is located, if this mezzanine is intended for use by no more than 10 persons.
5. In the low building with fire resistance class "D" or "E" in encapsulated staircases, closed doors with fire resistance class E and 30, the execution of gears and stair materials of combustble materials is permitted.
6. The distance between the outside wall, constituting the housing of the staircase, and another outer wall of the same or other building should be determined in accordance with § 271, if at least one of these walls does not meet the requirements of the fire resistance class According to § 216 as for the floor of the building with this staircase.
§ 250. [ Cellars] 1. The piwnice should be separated from the rest of the building, except for the buildings of ZL IV low (N) and semi-diameter (SW) strokes and walls with a fire resistance class of at least R E and 60 and closed doors with fire resistance class which I. e. If the doors to the basements are below the level of the terrain, the stairs leading from that level should be secured in such a way as to prevent the mistake of the people to descend into the basements in case of evacuation (eg. a mobile barrier).
2. In the building high (W) and high-wall (WW) cellars should be separated from the staircase of the fire-fire-house.
§ 251. [ Exit from the staircase] The exit from the staircase to the attic or loft shall be closed by a door or door of fire resistance class at least:
1) in low-cost buildings (N)-E I 15;
2) in semi-circular buildings (SW) and higher-E I 30.
§ 252. [ Schody and inclined moving] Staircases and mobile slipways are not included in the evacuation roads.
§ 253. [ Crane] 1. In the building ZL I, ZL II, ZL III or ZL V, having a floor with a floor above 25 m above the ground level at the lowest entrance to the building and in the high-altitude building (WW) ZL IV, at least one crane in each zone The fire department should be adapted to the needs of the rescue team, meeting the requirements of the Polish Fire Department for the fire brigade.
2. A lift to the crane for rescue crews should lead by a fire vestibule meeting the requirements specified in § 232.
3. The walls and ceilings of the crane shaft for the rescue crews should have the fire resistance class required for the building's ceilings, according to § 216.
4. The crane's glass for rescue crews should be equipped with anti-smoke devices.
§ 254. (repealed).
§ 255. (repealed).
§ 256. [ Length of evacuation route] 1. The length of the escape route from the exit from the room for this route to the exit to the other fire zone or outside the building, hereinafter referred to as the "escape milking", shall be measured along the axis of the escape route. In case of completion of the evacuation entrance to the fire-fighting atrium, this length shall be measured to the first door of this vestibule.
2. As an equivalent departure to another fire zone referred to in paragraph. 1, an exit to an encapsulated staircase of at least E and 30, fitted with a smoke-proof or smoke-removing device, shall be deemed to be closed and, in the case referred to in paragraph 246 (2), paragraph 246 (1) shall be considered as having been used for the operation of the staircase. 5-closed smoke-resistant doors.
3. Possible escape distances in the fire zones are defined in the following table:
| Type of fire zone |
Length of estuary in m |
|
| at one advent |
At least 2 in the commusions 1) |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| With room at risk of explosion |
10 |
40 |
| PM with fire density Q > 500 MJ/m 2 without room at risk of explosion |
30 2) |
60 |
| PM with fire density Q ≤ 500 MJ/m 2 without room at risk of explosion |
60 2) |
100 |
| ZL I, II and V |
10 |
40 |
| ZL III |
30 2) |
60 |
| ZL IV |
60 2) |
100 |
1) For the shortest, with a maximum of 100% greater than the shortest possible length. These advent must not overlap or cross.
2) Including no more than 20 m on the horizontal escape route.
4. The lengths of the evacuations referred to in paragraph 1 shall be completed. 3, may be enlarged on condition of protection:
(1) a fire zone with fixed self-active water extinguishing devices by 50%;
2. evacuation pathways by self-active smoke detection devices with a 50% smoke detection system.
When these devices are used, the length of the outlet may be increased by 100%.
5. Exit from the staircase referred to in paragraph. 2, should lead outside the building, either directly or in the horizontal ways of general communication, the enclosure of which corresponds to the requirements of § 249 (1). 1, and the openings in the housing shall be closed with a fire resistance class at least E and 30.
6. An evacuation route to the external exit of the building from the staircase and from the horizontal roads of the general communication by the hall can also be carried out, which may also fulfil the functions that complement the functions resulting from the purpose of the building, such as as: prescriptions, building protection, small sales, provided that:
1) by one hall it is possible to carry out an escape route only from one staircase, with this limitation not referring to staircases with separate, not leading by this hall, evacuation exit;
2) the hall is not located in the fire zone PM with a fire load density exceeding 500 MJ/m 2 or containing a room at risk of explosion;
3) the hall is separated from the horizontal roads of general communication, as is required for the staircase referred to in point 1;
4. the free width of the escape route shall be at least 50% greater than the width of the horizontal escape route in the building, leading to that exit, determined in accordance with § 242 paragraph. 1, for the storey of the building with the highest number of expected persons, located there simultaneously;
5. the height of the hall in the place where the escape route takes place shall be not less than 3,3 m;
6. the width of the exit door on the outside of the building is more than 50% higher than the minimum width of the output door determined in accordance with § 239 (1). 4.
7. The permissible length of the road from the exit from the staircase referred to in the paragraph. 2, to the outside of the building shall be determined in accordance with the paragraph. 3.
§ 257. [ Evacuation Ladder] 1. In the PM building, where the second escape route is required for people from a higher floor, the evacuation ladder, leading to the roof over the lower floor or on the level of the site, is allowed on this road if the number of persons occupying at the same time the higher floor does not exceed 50, and in the building with room at risk of explosion-15. This does not apply to sheltered workshops.
2. Evacuation ladders shall be placed in easily accessible locations. The situation of ladders in front of skylights and windows is prohibited.
3. Execution of escape ladders shall be permitted without protective rims, when the height difference does not exceed 3 m, taking into account the requirements of § 101.
Chapter 5
Fire requirements for interior and permanent furnishing elements
§ 258. [ Prohibition of flammable materials] 1. In the fire zones ZL I, ZL II, ZL III and ZL V the use for the interior finishing of materials and perishable products, whose thermal decomposition products are very toxic or intensively dissipating, is prohibited.
1a. In the case of the use of loose finishing materials, in particular in curtains, curtains, drapes, coils and blinds, materials for which the characteristics of the tests in accordance with the Polish studies are easily inflamed shall be considered to be easily inflamed The standards relating to the flammability and spread of flame by textile products shall not satisfy at least one of the following criteria:
1) ti ≥ 4 s;
2) ts ≤ 30 s;
3. the third thread shall not be surround;
4) there are no flaming drops.
2. On the roads of general communication for evacuation purposes, the use of materials and construction products easily inflamed shall be prohibited.
§ 259. [ Floors] 1. Flooring raised by more than 0,2 m above the level of a floor or other medium should have:
1) non-combustible load-bearing structure and at least non-inflammable floor panels from the side of the underfloor space, having a fire resistance class at least R E I 30, and in the high-wall building (WW) or with fire zone having a density of more than 4000 MJ/m 2 and in fire zones ZL II, at least R E and 60;
2. subfloor space divided into sectors with a surface area of not more than 1000 m 2 Fire-resistance class divisions at least E and 30, and in the high-pressure building (WW) or with fire zone having a fire density of over 4000 MJ/m 2 -at least E and 60.
2. Electrical cables and cables and other installations made of combusted materials, conducted in the underfloor floor of the raised floor and in the space above suspended ceilings, used for ventilation or heating of the room, should have a cover or enclosures with a fire resistance class of at least E and 30, and in the high altitude building (WW) or in buildings with a fire zone with a fire density of more than 4000 MJ/m 2 -at least E and 60.
3. On the evacuation roads, execution in the floor of the raised openings for ventilation or heating is prohibited.
§ 260. [ Prohibition of easily inflammable partitions] 1. In rooms, intended for the simultaneous presence of more than 50 persons and in the manufacturing premises, the use of easily inflamed partitions, fixed elements of furnishing and interior decoration and floor coverings is prohibited.
2. In the rooms of fire zones ZL II, storage rooms and in rooms with raised floors, the use of flammable floor coverings is prohibited.
§ 261. [ Rooms to stay more than 200 people] Enclosures for the simultaneous presence of more than 200 adults or 100 children in which seats are set in rows should have:
1) seats and other seats difficult to inflammatory and non-breaking decomposition and combustion products, defined as very toxic, in accordance with the Polish Norm for the research of the secretion of toxic products; determination of difficult flammable is attributed to photomas and other seats which do not undergo a progressive burning and flame burning under the conditions defined in the Polish Standard for the examination of the flammability of upholstered furniture;
2. the width of the transition between the rows of seats of not less than 0,45 m, the distance being determined, taking into account the distance between the fixed components of the seats;
3. number of seats in a row not more than 16 between the transitions and 8 in front row, with an increase in the number of rows in rows of up to 40 and 20 provided that the space between the rows of seats is increased by 1 cm for each an additional seat over 16 or 8 respectively;
4. a communication width of not less than 1,2 m in the number of persons up to 150 and, with more than one figure, the width should be increased proportionately by 0,6 m per 100 persons;
5) rows of seats or benches permanently attached to the floor or seats rigidly combined with each other in rows and between rows.
§ 262. [ Ceiling linings and ceiling coverings] 1. The ceiling coverings and suspended ceilings shall be made of non-flammable or non-flammable, non-dripping and non-flammable materials under the influence of fire. This requirement does not apply to apartments.
2. The space between the suspended ceiling and the ceiling should be divided into sectors with an area of not more than 1000 m 2 And in the corridors-50 m divisions, made of non-combustble materials.
§ 263. [ Use of wall coverings] 1. In bathrooms and saunas with gas furnaces and gas and electrical thermals, the use of wall coverings of combustble materials is permitted, except that the distance of these devices from the lining shall be at least 0,3 m.
2. The use of wall coverings with flammable materials in bathrooms and saunas with a solid fuel furnace is prohibited.
§ 264. [ Pal elements of the building's interior design] The combustible elements of the interior design of the building, through which the heating, ventilation, smoke and/or internal combustion pipelines are being carried out, should be protected against the possibility of inflammation or charting.
Chapter 6
Fire requirements for pallenic and installation
§ 265. [ Palelow] 1. The pale should be placed on a non-flammable medium with a thickness of at least 0,15 m, and at metal furnaces without feet-0,3 m. The floor easily flammable before the doors of the furnace shall be protected by a belt of non-flammable material of a width of at least 0,3 m, which extends beyond the edges of the door at least after 0,3 m.
2. The open pebble can be used only in a room where there is no threat of explosion, at a distance of at least 0.6 m from the easily inflamed parts of the building. On the premises with a wooden ceiling, the open fire should have a hood made of non-combustible materials, protruding at least 0,3 m outside the edge of the palate.
3. Metal or metal stove, connection pipes and cleaning openings shall be separated from easily flammable, non-sheathed structural parts of the building at least 0,6 m and from the sheltered planing of the plaster of a thickness of 25 mm or other an equivalent lining-at least 0.3 m.
4. Piec of stone, bricks, tiles and similar non-combusted materials, as well as combustion and smoke ducts shall be separated from easily flammable, non-shielded structural parts of the building at least 0,3 m, and from plastered planing with a thickness of 25 mm on the grid or equivalent lining-at least 0.15 m.
§ 266. [ Exhaust and Smoke Cables] 1. The exhaust and smoke cables shall be made from non-combusted products.
2. The conductors or casing of the exhaust and smoke pipes shall meet the requirements set out in the Polish Standard for the testing of fire-resistant small chimneys.
3. The execution of the enclosure referred to in paragraph 1 shall be authorised. 2, with a brick full thickness of 12 cm, masked on a cement-lime mortar, with an external plaster or a spooning.
4. Between the outlet of the combustion wire and the smoke and the nearest crown extreme of the adult trees, a distance of at least 6 m shall be ensured, subject to § 271 (1) (a). 8.
§ 267. [ Ventilation Ducts] 1. ventilation ducts shall be made of non-combustible materials, and combustible thermal and acoustic insulation and other flammable ventilation ducts may be used only on the external surface in a manner which ensures that the non-proliferation of fire.
2. In the PM buildings, except for garages, the execution of non-fire-firing ventilation ducts, provided that they are not carried out by evacuation routes and do not flow in air with a temperature exceeding 85 ° C or impurities which may be postponed.
3. The distance of non-insulated ventilation ducts from the lining and the flammable surfaces should be at least 0.5 m.
4. The rectifier door used in the ducts and ventilation ducts shall be made of non-combustble materials.
5. In the kitchen room or in the kitchen bay in the apartment, the ventilation ducts of the exhaust gas from materials at least difficult to ignite are permitted.
6. Flexible connecting elements for the combination of rigid ventilation ducts with components of the installation or devices, except fans, shall be made of at least flammable materials, having a length of not more than 4 m, and should not be carried out by the fire separation elements.
7. Flexible elements connecting fans with ventilation ducts should be made of materials at least difficult to ignite, with their length should not exceed 0,25 m.
8. Thermal and acoustic insulation used in installations: water supply, sewage and heating systems should be made in a way that ensures the non-proliferation of fire.
§ 268. [ Mechanical ventilation and air conditioning installations] 1. Installations of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings, with the exception of single-family buildings and individual recreation, shall meet the following requirements:
1. ventilation ducts shall be carried out and carried out in such a way that, in the case of fire, they do not have an effect of more than 1 kN on the building elements and that they pass through the bulkheads in such a way as to compensate for the elongation of the wire;
2. the fitting of the wires to the building elements shall be made of non-combustible materials to ensure the take-over of the resulting force in the event of fire at a time not less than that required for the class of fire resistance of the hose or cut-off flap;
3. in the ventilation ducts, no other installation shall be carried out;
4) filters and silencers should be protected from moving to their interior burning particles;
5. ventilation and air conditioning machines in residential buildings of semi-averages (SW) and higher and other buildings above two floors above two should be separated by walls with a fire resistance class of at least E and 60 and a closed door with a fire resistance class of at least E and 30; this does not apply to the enclosure of the equipment installed above the roof of the building.
2. An installation in the ventilation duct is allowed for electric heaters and heaters for liquid or gaseous fuel, whose heating surface temperature exceeds 160 ° C, provided the temperature limiter is applied, automatically exempting heating after reaching 110 ° C air temperature and the safety of the heaters without air flow.
3. The ventilation of fans and equipment for the treatment of air shall be allowed to be installed on condition that their housing is carried out with fire resistance class E and 60.
4. ventilation and air conditioning systems at the point of passage through the fire separation elements shall be equipped with fire fire-fighting flaps with fire resistance class equal to the fire resistance class of the separation element Fire suppression due to fire leakage, fire insulation and smoke insulation (E I S), subject to paragraph. 5.
5. The ventilation and air conditioning units operated by the fire zone which they do not operate shall have the fire-resistance class required for the fire separation elements of these fire zones due to the fire-tightness, fire insulation and smoke-resistant (E I S) or shall be fitted with fire-fighting flaps in accordance with paragraph (s). 4.
6. In the fire zones where the signaling and alarm system is required, fire-fire dams should be activated by this installation, regardless of the thermal trigger used.
§ 269. [ Devices that hold fans automatically.] 1. In premises at risk of explosion, devices shall be used for the automatic operation of the fans in the event of fire and indicating their exclusion, if the operation of the fans could contribute to its spread.
2. In premises at risk of explosion, separate extraction installation shall be used for each room.
3. ventilation of exhaust vents shall take into account the relative density of vapours of liquids and gases present in the room in relation to the air, and the predicted direction of air pollutant movement.
4. In rooms where combustible dust may exist, forming with air of explosive mixture, the vents of the infamous ventilation shall be situated and constructed so as not to cause the application of the dust to the axians.
5. Filters, dust chambers and cyclones for combustible dust shall be located indoors separated by fire separation elements or outside the building, in a place safe for these devices and for the surroundings.
6. Requirements referred to in paragraph. 5, do not relate to cases justified on technological grounds in which filters, dust chambers and cyclones constitute direct equipment of the equipment and production aggregates.
7. The ventilation ducts before the point of entry into the dust chambers and cyclones shall be equipped with devices to prevent the transfer of fire.
8. The dust chamber and cyclones for dust forming with air of explosive mixture shall be fitted with flaps or explosion-dams, securing the structure of the cyclone and chamber, as well as the structure of the building against the effects of the explosion.
§ 270. [ Installation of dedification ventilator] 1. Installation of the disdicting ventilation should:
1) remove smoke with intensity ensuring that, during the time needed to evacuate people on protected crossings and evacuation roads, there is no smoke or temperature to prevent safe evacuation;
2) have a permanent supply of external air complementary to the deficiencies of the air as a result of its outflow together with smoke.
2. Dying ventilators, serving:
1. only one fire zone shall have a fire integrity class due to fire integrity and smoke-resistance-E600 S, at least such as the fire integrity of the ceiling specified in § 216, and the use of class E300 S is permitted, if the resulting smoke temperature of the resulting fire does not exceed 300 ° C;
2. more than one fire zone, shall have a fire integrity class E and S, at least such as the fire integrity class of the ceiling specified in § 216.
3. The cut-off lapses for the conductive ventilation ducts, operating:
1. only one fire zone shall be activated automatically and shall have a fire integrity class due to fire integrity and smoke-resistance-E600 S AA, at least such as the fire integrity of the ceiling specified in § 216, An E300 S AA class is permitted if the resulting smoke temperature of the resulting fire does not exceed 300 ° C;
2) more than one fire zone, shall be activated automatically and have a fire integrity class E I S AA, at least such as the fire resistance class specified in § 216.
4. Dodizing fans should have class:
1. F600 60, if the expected smoke temperature exceeds 400 ° C;
(2) F400 120 in other cases, where other classes are allowed, if the analysis of the calculation of the smoke temperature and the safety of the rescue crews is possible.
5. Smoke flip-flops in the gravitational devotion ventilation should have the class:
1) B300 30-for auto-opening claps;
2) B600 30-for claps opened only in manual mode.
Chapter 7
Location of buildings due to fire safety
§ 271. [ Distance between external walls of buildings] 1. The distance between external walls of buildings which are not walls of fire separation, and having a surface of more than 65% of fire resistance class (E), as defined in § 216 paragraph. 1 in 5 column of the table, should not, subject to the paragraph. 2 and 3, be less than the distance in meters specified in the following table:
| Building type and PM building maximum load density fire-fire zone PM Q in MJ/m 2 |
Building type and PM building maximum load density fire-fire zone PM Q in MJ/m 2 |
||||
| ZL |
IN |
PM |
|||
| Q ≤ 1000 |
1000 < Q ≤ 4000 |
Q > 4000 |
|||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
| ZL |
8 |
8 |
8 |
15 |
20 |
| IN |
8 |
8 |
8 |
15 |
20 |
| PM Q ≤ 1000 |
8 |
8 |
8 |
15 |
20 |
| PM 1000 < Q ≤ 4000 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
15 |
20 |
| PM Q > 4000 |
20 |
20 |
20 |
20 |
20 |
2. If one of the external walls situated on the side of the adjacent building or the covering of the roof of one of the buildings is the fire spreading, then the distance referred to in the paragraph. 1 shall be increased by 50%, and if both external walls or the roof cover of both buildings are concerned, by 100%.
3. If at least one of the buildings has a room at risk of explosion, then the distance between their external walls should not be less than 20 m.
4. If the external wall of the building is not more than 65% but not less than 30%, the fire-resistance class (E), as defined in § 216 (1), shall be provided. 1 in 5 column of the table, then the distance between this wall or its part and the outer wall of the second building should be increased in relation to the specified in the paragraph. 1 and 2 by 50%.
5. If the outer wall of the building is less than 30% of the fire resistance class (E), as defined in § 216 paragraph. 1 in 5 column of the table, then the distance between this wall or its part and the outer wall of the second building should be increased in relation to the specified in the paragraph. 1 and 2 by 100%.
6. The distance between the walls of external buildings or parts of these walls may be reduced by 50%, in relation to the specified in the mouth. 1-5, if fixed water fire-extinguishing systems are used in all the fire zones of the buildings, adjacent to those walls or their parts, respectively.
7. The distance from the external wall of the building or its part to the external wall of the second building may be reduced by 25%, in relation to the specified in the mouth. 1-5, if in all fire zones of the building adjacent to this wall or its parts, fixed water fire-extinguishing systems are used.
8. The smallest distance of the buildings ZL, PM, IN from the forest boundary should be taken as the distance of the walls of these buildings from the walls of the ZL building with the roof cover spreading the fire.
9. The distances referred to in paragraph. 1, for the buildings mentioned in § 213, without premises at risk of explosion, it can be reduced by 25% if they are returned to each other by walls and roofs with non-flaming firewalls, not having holes.
10. In the belt of the area of the width specified in the mouth. 1-7, the surrounding exterior walls of the building, other than the walls of the fire separation, the outer walls of another building should meet the requirements specified in § 232 mouth. 4 and 5 for the walls of the fire separation of both buildings.
11. The requirement referred to in paragraph 1. 10, refers to the belt of the site with a 50% reduction in the outer walls of the two buildings, which form an angle of 60 ° or greater, but less than 120 °.
12. The requirement referred to in paragraph 1. 10, does not apply to buildings which:
1) are separated from each other by the wall of the fire separation, meeting the requirements laid down in § 232 (1) of the requirement for both buildings. 4 and 5, subject to § 218, or
2) have external walls forming between each other an angle of not less than 120 °.
13. Open landfill, due to the location, should be treated as a PM building.
§ 272. [ The wall distance from the boundary of the unbuilt parcel] 1. The distance of the external wall of the erected building from the border of the adjacent unbuilt building plot shall be at least half of the distance specified in § 271 (1). 1-7, assuming that there will be a building on the site of the site of the destination defined in the local zoning plan, and it is necessary for the PM buildings that it will have the density load density of the zone. fire Q greater than 1000 MJ/m 2 , but not more than 4000 MJ/m 2 And, in the absence of such a plan, the ZL building with the external wall referred to in § 271 (3). 1.
2. Non-homestead dwellings, individual recreation and residential and economic housing, with walls and roofs with non-flammable blocks of fire, should be at a distance not less than the neighbouring border, non-built-up parcel than is specified in § 12.
3. The building located directly at the border of the parcel should have from the side of the adjacent plot the wall separation wall with the fire resistance class specified in § 232 mouth. 4 and 5.
§ 273. [ The distances between the walls of external buildings] 1. The distance between the walls of the external buildings situated on one building plot shall not be determined, subject to § 249 paragraph. 6, if the total internal surface of these buildings does not exceed the minimum permissible surface area of the fire zone required for each of the types of buildings located on that site.
2. The distance of the ground oil tank of the heating supply of the boiler room from the ZL building should be at least 10 m.
3. The reduction of the distance referred to in paragraph shall be allowed. 2, up to 3 m, subject to the execution of the external wall of the building from the side of the tank as a fire separation wall with the fire resistance class of at least R E I 120 or the execution of such a wall between the building and the tank.
4. Reservoirs referred to in paragraph. 3, they should be made as a steel bias or be localised on a site formed in the form of a non-tank, with a capacity greater than the capacity of the tank, with insulation preventing the oil from entering the ground.
5. The distance of the ZL building from the reservoir of underground fuel oil, covered with a layer of earth of a thickness of not less than 0,5 m, should be at least 3 m, and from the spout, respiratory and measuring device of this reservoir-at least 10 m.
6. The distances of the buildings PM and IN made of non-flammable materials from the tanks and their devices referred to in paragraph. 5, should be at least 3 m.
Chapter 8
Fire requirements for garages
§ 274. [ Fire requirements for garages] 1. The fire requirements specified in this chapter apply to closed and open garages, referred to in § 102-108.
2. Where the provision of the Regulation does not specify the type of garage, it shall be understood to refer to closed and open garages.
3. One-storey, open open garage, which has the form of parking spaces with uncovered manoeuvring roads, should have elements of the structure and roof cover not captivating under the influence of high temperature.
§ 275. [ Fire resistance class of the garage] 1. The fire resistance class of the garage should be taken, as for the PM building with a fire density of up to 500 MJ/m 2 , provided that its components are not fire, non-captivating and non-flame-fire, unless otherwise provided for in the Regulation.
2. It shall be admissible, subject to § 277 (1). 5, the execution of the highest level of open garage, which is a low building (N), an additional level of parking spaces without a roofing or with a roofing meeting the requirements of § 274 ust. 3.
3. An open garage, whose highest level of parking is not higher than 25 m above the level of the surrounding area, can be made in class D fire resistance, if above the floor designed to park the cars are not found other room.
§ 276. [ The location of the garage closed and open] 1. A closed and open garage should comply with the conditions set out in § 271 as for PM buildings with a fire density of up to 1000 MJ/m 2 , subject to § 19.
2. The provision of the paragraph. 1 shall not apply to the garage with a number of parking positions not more than 3, in the construction of a single family and individual recreation.
§ 277. [ The area of the fire area in the garage closed] 1. The area of the fire zone in the stuffed or underground parking garage should not exceed 5000 m 2 .
2. The area referred to in paragraph 2. 1, may be increased by 100% if one of the following conditions is met:
1) the protection of the fire zone with permanent self-active water extinguishing devices;
2) performed, separating from each other no more than after 2 parking positions, the walls with fire resistance class, in full part at least E I 30, from the floor to the level of providing the rest under the ceiling of 0.1 to 0.5 m on the all their length.
3. In the garage, a fire zone comprising more than one underground storey shall meet one of the conditions set out in the paragraph. 2.
4. In a closed garage with a total area exceeding 1500 m 2 It is appropriate to use the self-active dissolution devices.
5. In case of application of the solution referred to in paragraph. For the fire integrity of the conductive ventilation ducts, paragraph 2 (1) shall comply with the requirements set out in § 270 (1). 2-only in view of the fire-tightness criterion (E).
§ 278. [ Evacuation Exits] 1. On every floor of the garage, the total area of which exceeds 1500 m 2 There should be at least two evacuation exits, one of which may be an entry or exit. The length of the transition to the nearest evacuation exit shall not exceed:
1) in a closed garage-40 m;
2) in the open garage-60 m.
2. The length of the passage referred to in paragraph. 1, in the case of a closed garage, may be enlarged in accordance with the rules set out in § 237 paragraph. 6 and 7.
3. Evacuation output should also be available when the gates are closed between the fire zones.
4. If the level of parking is not higher than 3 m above the level of the area arranged by the building, an uncovered external staircase may be used for escape exits.
5. In the garage underground floors above 1500 m 2 should, in the event of a fire, be able to separate them from each other and from the floor of the stuffed building by means of doors, gates or other closures of a fire-resistance class of not less than E and 30.
§ 279. [ Distance] 1. In the closed garage, located in the ZL building, the vertical distance between the garage doors and the windows of this building should be at least 1.5 m. This distance can be 1,1 m, if the entrance to the garage is made of non-combustible materials with a range of at least 0,6 m from the side of the wall, at least 0,8 m on the side of the side of the gate of the garage, or if the garage gate is withdrawn by 0,8 m the side of the wall.
2. In the building referred to in paragraph. 1, the distance of the gate of the built-in garage or the built from the nearest edge of the windows of the rooms intended for the stay of the people in the same building shall not be less than 1,5 m in a horizontal cast.
§ 280. [ Connection of garage to the building] 1. The connection of the garage to the building requires the use of a fire-vestibule closed door with a fire resistance class of at least E and 30.
2. The application of the vestibule referred to in paragraph shall not be required. 1, in front of the cranes separated from the garage door with a fire resistance class at least E and 60.
3. The requirement referred to in paragraph 1. 1, does not apply to single-family dwellings and individual recreation.
§ 281. [ Installing in the garage of the review wells] Installation in the garage of the recvitational wells, appliances and gas pipes, subject to § 164 ust. 6, and the insertion of openings from pallets or revisions intended for cleaning of smoke, exhaust and ventilation ducts, shall be prohibited.
Chapter 9
Fire requirements for livestock buildings
§ 282. [ Exemptions from requirements] From the requirements of the fire resistance class of buildings, as defined in § 212, the buildings in the gross cubature of up to 1500 m shall be released 3 .
§ 283. [ Flooring, walls and ceilings] Pallets, boiler rooms and other premises equipped with furnaces or kitchenware, located in the buildings of the IN, should have floors, walls and ceilings made of non-combustble materials.
§ 284. [ Building IN] The IN building should meet the following evacuation requirements:
1. the distance from the furthest position for the animals to the escape exit shall not exceed 50 m at the bedding of the animals and 75 m at a non-bedding position;
2. in the unbridled chow of bovine animals, swine and sheep, if the number of bovine animals and swine does not exceed 15 pieces, and sheep, 200 pieces, at least one evacuation exit shall be used;
3. in a building intended for more animals than those mentioned in point 2, at least two exits shall be used and at least one evacuation exit from each section shall be used in sections divided into sections;
4) the gate and the doors in the livestock building should be opened outside the room.
§ 285. [ Placement in the building of residential and economic parts] Residential and economic parts are allowed to be placed in one building under the following conditions:
1) the residential part and the economic part have separate entrants;
2) between the residential part and the economic part will be performed wall with fire resistance class at least R E I 60.
Chapter 10
Fire requirements for temporary buildings
§ 286. [ Temporary Building] 1. A temporary building intended for permanent human stay should be performed at least in the class "E" fire resistance. Such a building should not have an underground storey and more than 2 floors of the filth.
2. To determine the minimum distance of a temporary building from another building shall apply provisions specifying the distances between the buildings of the ZL, the PM or IN, referred to in § 271 and § 273-paragraph. 1.
3. Temporary building made of combustble materials or with flammable insulation shall be lost at intervals not exceeding 24 m walls of fire-resistance classes with fire resistance class R E I 60; this does not apply to the cases specified Paragraphs 287 and 288.
4. The fire separation wall shall be ejected at least by 0.6 m outside the outer wall lico and above the flammable roof covering.
5. Access to the attic of a temporary building made of combusted materials should be made possible by means of an internal flap with a flap, referred to in § 251 point 1, with dimensions of at least 0,6 × 0,6 m, or by a ladder and external door of dimensions at least 0.6 x 1.6 m, placed in the top of the building wall.
6. The use of electrical or gas installations in the attic of a temporary building made of combustible materials shall be prohibited.
§ 287. [ Purpose of temporary building] A temporary building may be intended for the purpose of a spectacle or other assembly of people if:
1) is one-storey;
2) the audience is accessible from the ground level;
3) the roof or stropods shall be covered at least as difficult to ignite;
4) has the exits, transitions and evacuation outlets of the number and dimensions specified in the regulations of the Regulation, marked-according to the Polish Standards-the signs of safety;
5) has emergency lighting;
6) has an electrical installation carried out according to the Polish Norms.
§ 288. [ Room with pneumatic casing] The room with pneumatic housing can be used as a temporary building PM with a fire density of fire zone not higher than 1000 MJ/m 2 , provided that:
1) the maintenance of a distance of at least 20 m from other construction sites;
2) use of the coating of the material at least difficult to igniter;
3) use of air heating only;
4. to ensure the number and dimensions of the exits, to arrive and to undergo evacuations as defined in the provisions of the Regulation;
5) marking of evacuation exits-according to Polish Norms-signs of safety;
6) equipment in emergency lighting;
7) equipment in the electrical installation performed according to the Polish Norms.
§ 289. [ Room equipment] The premises referred to in § 288 intended for the purposes of spectacle, exhibition, recreational or sports purposes shall be additionally equipped with:
1) constructions placed inside or outside the building for emergency support of the pneumatic coatings;
2) an emergency device for maintaining the pressure in the coating, powered by an independent energy source;
3) emergency mechanical ventilation for air exchange, powered by an independent energy source;
4. evacuation exits deployed as evenly as possible on the circumference;
5) chairs connected with each other in a durable and immobilized manner in rows of at least 8 pieces, set in accordance with the requirements set out in § 261.
§ 290. [ Temporary building of the tent type] The temporary building of a tent type for the purpose of the spectacle shall meet the requirements of § 288 and 289, with the exception of the requirements for coating pressure devices in the coating.
CHAPTER VII
Security of use
§ 291. [ Building and facilities related to it] The building and its associated facilities should be designed and constructed in such a way as to make it impossible to accept the risk of accidents in use, in particular by taking into account the provisions of this chapter.
§ 292. [ Entrance to the building] 1. The entrance to a building of more than two floors, having premises for the stay of the people, shall be protected by a roof or protective floor with a width of more than 1 m or more from the width of the door and of the exposition or a depth of not less than 1 m in low buildings (N) and 1,5 m in higher buildings. This requirement does not apply to buildings on the grounds of detention facilities, investigative detention facilities, and correctional facilities and shelters for minors.
2. The daszek referred to in the mouth. 1, it shall be designed to permit the transfer of any possible charges that may result in the collapse of façade lining, window wings or glass panes.
§ 293. [ Location of buildings related to the building] 1. Information boards, advertisements and similar devices and decorations shall be so situated, constructed and fixed so as not to constitute a security threat to the occupants of the building and to third parties.
2. Peaks, balconies and fixed and mobile sun visors may be placed at a height of at least 2,4 m above the level of the sidewalk, leaving an unshielded bandwidth from the roadside of at least 1 m in width.
3. Storefronts, advertising display cases and technical enclosures shall not be extended beyond the surface of the building's exterior wall by more than 0,5 m-with a usable width of not less than 2 m and an assurance of the safety of movement for persons with visual organ dysfunction.
4. Door and window wings, and bars, shutters or other shielding, in an open or closed position, shall not narrow the width of the application of the pavement located directly at the wall of the external building in which they are located.
5. Requirement as set out in paragraph. 4 also applies to external staircases and slipways.
6. Lighting devices, including advertisements, placed outside the building or in its surroundings shall not cause nuisance to its users or pedestrians and drivers. If the lamp is directed to the facade of the building containing the windows, the illumination at that façade shall not exceed 5 lux in the case of white light and 3 lux in the case of a colour or light-changing light, flashing, possibly pulsating.
§ 294. [ Drainage Drainage] 1. Sewerage drains, terrain and underground installation covers and other openings, situated on the passage or passage route, shall be located in the plane of the pavement or carriageway.
2. Sewerage drains and perforated holes in the sidewalk plane or pass through the gut shall have gaps between the bars and/or the diameter of the openings no greater than 20 mm.
3. Placement of conquests, scrapers, shoe wipers or similar devices protruding above the plane of the entrance door in the width of the entrance door to the building is prohibited.
§ 295. [ Door Wings] Door wings, made of transparent tafles, shall be marked visibly and made of material that ensures the safety of users in the case of breakage.
§ 296. [ External and internal stairs] 1. External and internal stairs, designed to overcome the height of more than 0,5 m, shall be provided with balustrades or other safeguards from the side of the open space.
2. In a residential building of a single-family, at the risk and recreation of an individual condition as defined in the mouth. 1 shall be considered to be satisfied even if the staircase and the slipways of up to 1 m, which are not balustrades, are both sides wider in relation to the door or other passage to which they lead, at least after 0,5 m.
3. The external and internal stairs referred to in paragraph. 1, in the public utility building should have railings or handrails, enabling the left-and right-to-use. An additional intermediate balustrade shall be used for the width of the staircase of more than 4 m.
§ 297. [ Construction of stairs, slipways, bridges and galleries] The construction of stairs, slipways, bridges and galleries, for general communication in residential building, collective residence and public service, cannot be prone to the vibrations caused by the users.
§ 298. [ Balustrades and railings] 1. Balustrades at the stairs, slipways, portfeneters, balconies and loggias should not have a rough cut, and their design should ensure the transfer of horizontal forces, defined in the Polish Standard on basic loads technological and assembly. The height and fill of vertical planes shall ensure effective protection against the loss of persons. Glass elements of the balustrade should be made of glass with an increased impact on impact, damping on small, non-sharp shards.
2. The height and intervals or openings in the filling of the balustrades shall have the dimensions specified in the table:
| Type of buildings (use-use) |
Minimum height balustrades, measured to Handy top (m) |
Maximum daytime or dimension openings between elements balustrade fill (m) |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| Single-family buildings and interiorings of multi-storey apartments |
0.9 |
does not regulate |
| Multi-family and residence buildings |
1.1 |
0.12 |
| Other buildings |
1.1 |
0.2 |
3. In a building that provides for collective residence of children without permanent supervision, balustrades should have solutions preventing climbing on them and sliding into the railing.
4. With railings or walls adjacent to the ramp, intended for the movement of persons with disabilities, bilateral handrails shall be used, placed at a height of 0,75 and 0,9 m from the plane of the movement.
5. The abductions on the external stairs and the slipways, before their beginning and beyond, shall be extended by 0,3 m and shall be terminated in such a way as to ensure safe use.
6. The porches on the stairs and the slipways shall be separated from the walls to which they are attached, at least 0,05 m.
7. Balustrades separating different levels in sports halls, theatres, cinemas, as well as in other public buildings should ensure the safety of users also in the case of panic. The vertical part of the balustrade shall be reduced to 0,7 m, provided the upper part of the balustrade is to be completed, with a width of at least 1,2 m in width, with a width of at least 1,2 m.
§ 299. [ Window] 1. The windows in the building above the second floor of the filling, as well as the windows on the lower floors, going out on the sidewalks or other pedestrian crossings, should have wings opened inwards.
2. The use of outdoor windows with a horizontal axis of rotation and a maximum wing clearance of up to 0,6 m shall be allowed, measured from the outer wall of the external wall, provided that the windows are used to ensure safety of use; and to allow their washing, maintenance and repair from inside the premises or from the technical devices installed outside the building.
3. The provisions referred to in paragraph 1. 1 and 2 do not apply to the building entered in the register of monuments.
4. The windows in the high-altitude building, on floors situated above 55 m above the terrain, should be provided with safeguards enabling them to be opened only by persons having the authority of the owner or the building manager.
5. The windows in the premises intended for use by persons with disabilities should have devices designed to open them, situated not higher than 1.2 m above the floor level.
§ 300. [ Krats and shutters] 1. External cells, used in window openings and balconies, shall be made in such a way as to prevent the possibility of climbing them to the premises situated on higher floors.
2. Krats and shutters, in at least one window openings, should open from the inside:
1) apartment;
2) a living room located in a building other than a residential building;
3) premises intended for the stay of people in the basement or in a temporary building of combustor materials;
4) the premises referred to in § 239 (1). 2.
3. Requirements referred to in paragraph. 1 and 2, do not concern penal facilities and detention facilities and correctional facilities and shelters for minors.
§ 301. [ Distance] 1. In the building on floors situated below 25 m above the ground, the distance between the upper edge of the inner window and the floor shall be at least 0,85 m, except for the ground and the subwindow walls in the loggias, on the terrace or the gallery, where it is not subject to restrictions.
2. In the building on floors situated above 25 m above the ground between the upper edge of the window and the floor should be kept the distance of at least 1.1 m, except for windows coming out on loggias, terraces or galleries.
3. The height of the window of the window, as defined in the paragraph. 1 and 2, may be reduced, provided the balustrade window protection is applied to the required height or use in that part of the window of the unopened and glass-proof boxes.
§ 302. [ Temperature] 1. In the building with rooms intended to stay people, the temperature on the surface of the central heating elements, not protected from the touch by the occupants, shall not exceed 90 °C.
2. In the building referred to in paragraph. 1, but with air heating, the temperature of the air stream at a distance of 1 cm from the outlet to the room shall not exceed 70 ° C-if it is more than 3,5 m from the floor level and 45 ° C-in other cases.
3. In the space dedicated to the collective stay of children and persons with disabilities on the radiators of central heating, the shielding should be placed, protecting from direct contact with heating element.
4. In buildings dedicated to the collective stay of children and persons with disabilities, thermostatic mixing valves with a limit of maximum temperature of up to 43 °C and in shower installations up to 38 ° C should be used in the installation of hot water, anti-burn.
§ 303. [ Balconies] 1. In a building on floors above 25 m above terrain it is forbidden to use balconies. This does not apply to balconies of technological importance.
2. In the building on floors above 25 m above terrain, loggias can only be used with full balustrades. The use of the logic above 55 m above the terrain is prohibited.
3. In the building on floors above 12 m, but not more than 25 m above the terrain, it is possible to use the portfeneters, provided that the thresholds of at least 0,15 m are used in them.
§ 304. [ Glazing of Latin windows] 1. Glazing of the Latin windows, the edge of which is situated at a height of more than 3 m above the floor level, skylights and roofs in public utility buildings and work plants, should be made of glass or other raised material Impact on impact.
2. The glass flooring of the external walls of the high and high-wall building should be made of glass with increased impact on impact, damping on small, non-sharp shards.
§ 305. [ Surfaces to come to buildings] 1. The uppers come to buildings, staircases and external and internal slipways, communication tractors in the building and floors in the premises for the stay of the people, as well as the floors in the garage, should be made of non-composable materials the non-safety of the slip.
2. The flooring and carpeting in the premises dedicated to the residence of the people should be made of antistatic materials, meeting the conditions set out in the Polish Standards for protection against static electricity.
3. The surface of an external car slipway with a gradient of more than 15% shall be carved.
§ 306. [ Change floor level] 1. In the public building, production and storage facilities, in the places where the floor level is changed, technical, plastic or other solutions should be used, or other signaling the difference.
2. In the buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, the surfaces of stairs and slipways shall have the finishing distinguishing them with the shade, colour or texture, at least in a belt of 30 cm from the edge of the beginning and ending of the staircase or the ramp.
§ 307. [ Information Array] In the production and storage building where variable load loads of floors, stairs or working bridges can occur, an information board shall be placed in a prominent position, indicating the maximum load capacity of these elements.
§ 308. [ Output to the roof] 1. In buildings with two or more floors, an exit to the roof of at least one staircase for access to the roof and to the technical equipment installed there shall be provided.
2. In the buildings of high (W) and high-wall (WW) exits referred to in paragraph. 1, ensure from each staircase.
3. As an exit from the staircase to the roof, a door with a width of 0,8 m and a height of at least 1,9 m or an extrusion flap with a dimension of 0,8 x 0,8 m shall be used in the light, to which access should comply with the conditions laid down in § 101.
4. On the roof with a drop of more than 25% and on the roof covered with broken (suppressive) materials, permanent access to chimneys, technical equipment and radio and television antenna should be carried out.
5. The advent referred to in paragraph. 4, on sections with a gradient of more than 25% should have protection against slipping.
6. On the roof with a decrease of more than 100% shall be fixed fixtures for safety ropes or protective barriers over the lower edge of the roof.
CHAPTER VIII
Hygiene and health
Chapter 1
General requirements
§ 309. [ Ensuring user hygiene and health] The building should be designed and constructed of such materials and articles and in such a way that it does not pose a risk to the hygiene and health of users or neighbours, in particular as a result of:
1) secretion of toxic gases;
2) the presence of harmful dusts or gases in the air;
3) dangerous radiation;
4) pollution or poisoning of water or soil;
5) abnormal removal of smoke and flue gas, and uncleanness and waste in solid or liquid form;
6) the occurrence of moisture in building elements or on their surfaces;
7) uncontrolled external air infiltration;
8) the penetrators of rodents into the interior;
9) the borderline of sunshine and natural lighting.
Chapter 2
Protection of air purity
§ 310. [ Protecting the air purity] 1. The building intended for the stay of the people and devices connected with it should be designed and made so that in the premises the content of the air concentrations and intensities of the factors harmful to health, secreted by the ground, materials and constants the equipment and the intended use of the premises do not exceed the limit values set out in the sanitary and occupational health and safety regulations.
2. Requirements referred to in paragraph. 1, shall apply mutatis mutandis to the premises intended for the animals.
3. In a room dedicated to the stay of people, in which the maintenance of special purity is required, the use of the radiators of the ribbed pipes is prohibited.
§ 311. [ Unacceptable concentrations of harmful substances] If unacceptable concentrations of harmful substances are present in the air that is exported from the room, the equipment should be used to dispose of them before the air is emitted.
§ 312. [ Compounds harmful to health] 1. Building with rooms dedicated to the stay of people, for livestock, as well as for the production and storage of groceries and pharmaceutical products can not be made of materials emitting compounds (gases, vapours, dust) harmful to health or fragrances in excess of their authorised concentrations.
2. If the compounds referred to in paragraph 1, are emitted by materials in an intolerable concentration only for a limited period of time, they are allowed to be used on condition that the use of the building or premises where the materials have been applied occurs only after the expiry of the period In the case of materials emitting particulate matter or fibrous impurities, after the competent national health inspector has established a state of air pollution that is consistent with the provisions of the case acceptable levels and intensities of harmful factors for the health of the construction materials, equipment and fittings.
Chapter 3
Protection against ionizing radiations and electromagnetic fields
§ 313. [ Radiation Protection] 1. The building with rooms intended for the stay of the people and for livestock must not be made of materials and fittings not meeting the requirements of the separate provisions on the permissible concentrations and intensity of harmful factors for health.
2. The average annual values of the equivalent concentration of radon in the premises of a building intended for permanent residence of the people shall not exceed the permissible value specified in the provisions of the separate radiation limit doses.
§ 314. [ Protection against electromagnetic field interactions] A building with spaces dedicated to the stay of the people cannot be erected in areas of zones where there is an exceedance of the permissible level of the electromagnetic field's influence, as defined by the provisions of the separate security regulations before the electromagnetic fields are affected.
Chapter 4
Protection against wetting and biosecurity
§ 315. [ Protection against wetting and biosecurity] The building should be designed and constructed in such a way that precipitation, water in the ground and on its surface, the water used in the building and the water vapour in the air in this building did not cause the health and hygiene hazards of use.
§ 316. [ Protection against water infiltration] 1. The building, located on the ground, on which the level of groundwater can cause water penetration into the premises, shall be protected by external drainage or otherwise before infiltrating the water into the interior and the moisture content.
2. The formation of the area around the building should provide free rainfall water from the building.
§ 317. [ Walls of the building cellars] 1. The walls of the building's cellars and the other elements of the building that are in contact with the ground, made of capillary water, should be protected by an appropriate anti-dampness insulation.
2. Parts of external walls, directly above the surrounding terrain, terraces, balconies and roofs, shall be protected from the penetration of the rainfall water and from melting snow.
§ 318. [ Design and material solutions of external partitions] Structural and material solutions of external partitions and their sealing should prevent the penetration of rain water into the interior of the buildings.
§ 319. [ Dachy i tarasy] 1. Dachs and terraces should have drops enabling the drain of rainwater and from melting snow to gutters and internal or external trigger pipes.
2. Dachs in buildings above 15 m above the level of the site should have declines enabling the water to drain into the internal drain pipes. This requirement does not apply to buildings of religious worship, spectacle buildings, sports halls, as well as production and storage facilities, in which such a way of drainage is impossible for technological reasons.
3. In the building slow standing up to 4.5 m high and the roof area up to 100 m 2 non-performance of gutters and drain pipes shall be permitted provided that the hoods are shaped in a way that protects against the wall.
§ 320. [ Balconies, loggias and terraces] Balconies, loggias and terraces should have flooring made of non-absorbent, frost-resistant and non-slippery materials.
§ 321. [ Protection against wetting and mold] 1. A water vapour condensation enabling the development of mould fungi shall not be present on the inside surface of the opaque outer bulkhead.
2. Within the interior of the bulkhead referred to in paragraph. 1, may not occur in subsequent years of wetting due to condensation of water vapour.
3. The conditions set out in the paragraph. 1 and 2 shall be considered to be satisfied if the divisions comply with the requirements set out in point 2.2.4 of Annex 2 to the Regulation.
§ 322. [ Protection against Crime] 1. The materials and structural solutions of the external divisions of the building, the heat and humidity conditions, as well as the intensity of air exchange indoors, should prevent the formation of the extermination.
2. Materials, products and construction elements that are resistant or resistant to extinctions and other forms of biodegradation shall be used for construction, respectively, to the extent of the threat of biological corrosion.
3. Prior to rebuilding, extension or alteration of the purpose of the building, in case of the occurrence of the occurrence of the moisture and the signs of biological corrosion, a mycological expert must be carried out and on the basis of its results-appropriate works safety.
CHAPTER IX
Noise protection and vibrations
§ 323. [ Protection against noise] 1. The building and its associated equipment should be designed and constructed in such a way that the noise level to which users or people in their vicinity will be exposed does not pose a threat to their health, and also enables them to the work, rest and sleep in satisfactory conditions.
2. The premises in residential buildings, collective residence and public service shall be protected from noise:
1) external penetrating into a room outside the building;
2) originating from installations and equipment constituting the technical equipment of the building;
3) air and impact, manufactured by the users of other apartments, commercial premises or premises with different performance requirements;
4) a rumor, resulting from the reflections of sound waves from partitions bounding the room.
§ 324. [ Building Securing] Building in which, due to its activity or the way in which it operates, burdensome noises or vibrations may arise, it is necessary to shape and secure such that the level of noise and vibrations penetrating the environment from the premises of this building did not exceed the limit values set out in the separate environmental regulations, and did not cause an exceedance of permissible sound levels and vibrations in the premises of other buildings subject to protection anticonvulsable and anticonvulsable, as defined in the Polish Norm, concerning Indoor sound-level values and the impact assessment of vibration on buildings and on people in buildings.
§ 325. [ Situation of Buildings] 1. Residential buildings, collective dwellings and public buildings should be placed at least exposed to noise and vibration, and if they occur and their levels will cause them to be in the premises of such buildings exceeding the permissible sound level and vibrations, defined in the Polish Standards concerning indoor sound level limits, and the assessment of the impact of vibrations on buildings and on people in buildings, effective safeguards should be applied.
2. Buildings with premises requiring protection against external noise and vibration should be protected against these nuisances by keeping the appropriate distances from their sources, location and shaping of the building, use of elements absorbing vibrations and shielding and shielding before noise, as well as the rational placement of the premises in the building and the provision of the acoustic insulation of the external partitions specified in the Polish Standard on the required acoustic insulation of partitions in buildings and sound insulation building elements.
§ 326. [ Noise and vibration level] 1. The level of noise and vibrations penetrating into the premises of residential buildings, collective dwellings and public buildings, excluding the buildings for which it is necessary to meet the specific requirements of protection against noise, it must not exceed the limit values, defined in the Polish Standards for the protection against noise of premises in buildings and the assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings, designated according to the Polish Standards on the Method measurements of indoor sound level and assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings.
2. In the buildings referred to in paragraph. 1, external and internal partitions and their components should have an acoustic insulation not less than that stated in the Polish Standard on the required acoustic insulation of partitions in buildings and sound insulation of elements construction, designated in accordance with the Polish Standards determining methods of measuring the acoustic insulation of building elements and acoustic insulation in buildings. The requirements apply to isolativeness:
1) external walls, ceilings, internal walls, windows in external and internal partitions and doors in internal partitions-from air sounds;
2) ceilings and floors-from air sounds and impact;
3) subways and gearboxes of staircases within the dwellings-from impact sounds.
3. The wiring and installation channels (including ventilation ducts) in the building must not result in deterioration of the acoustic insulation between the rooms below the values resulting from the requirements of the Polish insulation standard acoustic partition in buildings and acoustic insulation of building elements.
4. In a multi-family residential building:
1) The acoustic insulation of intermingling ceilings shall ensure that these ceilings are maintained by the acoustic characteristics referred to in paragraph 1. 2 (2), irrespective of the type of floor surface applied;
2) such functional systems should be avoided where sanitary facilities of one apartment are adjacent to the room of the adjacent apartment; if this requirement is not met, the intermingled wall separating the room of one Accommodation from the sanitary room and kitchen of the adjacent apartment, to which the wiring and installation devices are attached, must have a structure that limits the movement through the wall of the material sounds, which, in particular, can be get using a wall with a weight of not less than 300 kg/m 2 ;
3. when attaching the installation devices and cables inside the flat, which are technical equipment, the vibration protections shall be used independently of the structure and the position of the bulkhead to which they are fitted;
4. in justified cases, the following shall be allowed to locate:
(a) facilities serving other buildings-in technical premises,
(b) service facilities equipped with noisy machinery and equipment,
(c) catering establishments and other entertaining activities
-subject to the application of special anti-sonic and anti-vibration safeguards, so that, under the most adverse conditions of use, noise levels and vibrations penetrating into protected spaces do not exceed the value of the the permissible sound levels in the premises, measured in accordance with the Polish Standard on the method of measurement of the sound level in the premises, and specified in the Polish standard for the assessment of sound level the impact of vibrations on people in buildings.
5. In the premises of public buildings, the function of which is associated with a speech or other desirable acoustic signals, it is necessary to use such construction solutions as well as additional acoustic adaptations which will ensure the acquisition of the premises of the relevant conditions laid down by separate provisions. Acoustic adaptations are to be made from materials with sound absorption properties designated in accordance with the Polish Standard specifying the method of measuring the sound absorption of the building elements.
§ 327. [ Technical rooms with special burdensome] 1. It is forbidden to situate at the premises of the technical premises with special nuisance, such as glazing and crane machinery or junk. This requirement does not apply to the cases referred to in § 196 (1). 2 and § 197 (1) 2-for the superstructure or adaptation of the attic for residential purposes.
2. The installations and equipment constituting the technical equipment of a residential building, collective residence and public service, shall not give rise to excessive noise and vibrations, impeding the operation or preventing the protection of the goods. the user of the premises prior to their interaction.
3. The way of the devices referred to in paragraph 1. 1, and the manner of their connection to the guides and constructional elements of the building, as well as the way of connecting individual sections of the wires between each other and with the building elements of the building, should prevent the formation and dissolution of noise and vibrations to the premises to be protected or to the building environment.
4. Walls and ceilings and other building blocks of technical spaces and garages in multi-family dwellings and collective residences shall have a structure to prevent the penetration of noise and vibration from those premises. demanding protection.
SECTION X
Energy savings and thermal insulation
§ 328. [ Rational maintenance of heat energy] 1. The building and its heating, ventilation, air conditioning, hot water, and, in the case of public buildings, collective, production, economic and warehouse buildings-also embedded lighting, should be designed and constructed in such a way as to meet the following minimum requirements:
1) the value of the EP indicator [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)] determining the annual calculation demand for non-renewable primary energy for heating, ventilation, cooling and the preparation of hot water, and in the case of public buildings, collective residence, production, economic and storage-also for embedded lighting, calculated according to the provisions on the methodology for calculating the energy performance of buildings, is less than the value calculated according to the formula referred to in § 329 par. 1 or 3, taking into account the partial maximum values of the EP index referred to in § 329 (1). 2;
2. the bulkheads and technical equipment of the building shall meet at least the thermal insulation requirements set out in Annex no 2 to the Regulation and the surface of the windows shall comply with the requirements set out in point 2.1 of Annex 2 to the Regulation.
1a. The minimum requirements referred to in paragraph 1 shall be laid down. 1, it shall be considered to be fulfilled for the building under construction if the bulkheads and technical equipment of the building to be reconstructed correspond to at least the thermal insulation requirements set out in Annex no 2 to the Regulation, and the area of the windows shall comply with the requirements set out in point 2.1 of Annex 2 to the Regulation.
2. The building should be designed and constructed in such a way as to limit the risk of overheating of the building during the summer period.
§ 329. [ Requirements] 1. The maximum value of the EP indicator determining the annual calculation needs of the building for non-renewable primary energy for heating, ventilation, cooling, preparation of hot water and lighting is calculated as follows: a model:
EP = EPH + W + ΔEPC + ΔEPL; [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)]
where:
EPH + W-partial maximum EP value for heating, ventilating and hot water preparation
ΔEPC-partial maximum EP value for cooling,
ΔEPL-The partial maximum value of the EP indicator for lighting purposes.
2. Partial maximum EP values are:
1. for heating, ventilation and the preparation of hot water:
| Seq. |
Building Type |
Partial maximum values for EPH + W for needs heating, ventilating and preparation of hot water use [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)] |
||
| From 1 January 2014 |
From 1 January 2017 |
1 January 2021 *) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
||
| 1 |
Residential building: (a) one family (b) multifamily |
120 105 |
95 85 |
70 65 |
| 2 |
Collective residence |
95 |
85 |
75 |
| 3 |
Public utility building: (a) healthcare (b) |
390 65 |
290 60 |
190 45 |
| 4 |
Economic building, warehouse and production |
110 |
90 |
70 |
| *) From 1 January 2019 -in the case of buildings occupied by public authorities and owned by public authorities. |
||||
2) for cooling:
| Seq. |
Building Type |
Partial maximum ΔEPC values for cooling [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)] *) |
||
| From 1 January 2014 |
From 1 January 2017 |
1 January 2021 **) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
||
| 1 |
Residential building: (a) one family (b) multifamily |
ΔEPC = 10-Af, C/Af |
ΔEPC = 10-Af, C/Af |
ΔEPC = 5-Af, C/Af |
| 2 |
Collective residence |
ΔEPC = 25-Af, C/Af |
ΔEPC = 25-Af, C/Af |
ΔEPC = 25-Af, C/Af |
| 3 |
Public utility building: (a) healthcare (b) |
|||
| 4 |
Economic building, warehouse and production |
|||
| where: Af-usable area of heated building [ m 2 ]; Af, C-building cooled usable area [ m 2 ]. * ) If the building has a cooling installation, otherwise ΔEPC = 0 kWh/ (m 2 -year). ** ) From 1 January 2019 -in the case of buildings occupied by public authorities and owned by public authorities. |
||||
3. for lighting purposes:
| Seq. |
Building Type |
Partial maximum ΔEPL values for lighting purposes [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)] depending on the time of the lighting operation in the course of the year t0 [ h/year] *) |
||
| From 1 January 2014 |
From 1 January 2017 |
1 January 2021 **) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
||
| 1 |
Residential building: (a) one family (b) multifamily |
ΔEPL = 0 |
ΔEPL = 0 |
ΔEPL = 0 |
| 2 |
Collective residence |
for t0 < 2500 ΔEPL = 50 for t0 ≥ 2500 ΔEPL = 100 |
for t0 < 2500 ΔEPL = 50 for t0 ≥ 2500 ΔEPL = 100 |
for t0 < 2500 ΔEPL = 25 for t0 ≥ 2500 ΔEPL = 50 |
| 3 |
Public utility building: (a) healthcare (b) |
|||
| 4 |
Economic building, warehouse and production |
|||
| *) If embedded lighting is to be taken into account in the building, otherwise ΔEPL = 0 kWh/ (m 2 -year). **) From 1 January 2019 -in the case of buildings occupied by public authorities and owned by public authorities. |
||||
3. For buildings with different functional functions, maximum values of the EP indicator determining the annual calculation demand for non-renewable primary energy for heating, ventilation, cooling, preparation of hot water the utility and the built-in lighting shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:
EP = Σi (EPi-Af, i)/Σi Af, i; [ kWh/ (m 2 -year)]
where:
EPi-the maximum value of the EP indicator determining the annual calculation demand for non-renewable primary energy for heating, ventilation, hot water preparation, cooling and embedded lighting, for the part of the i-th building with a single functional function of the surface of the Af, and calculated in accordance with the formula referred to in paragraph 1. 1, taking into account the partial maximum values of the EP index referred to in paragraph. 2,
Af, i-usable area heated (cooled) and-this part of the building with a uniform application function.
4. Requirements stipulated in § 328 par. 2. it shall be considered to be satisfied if the windows and other glazed and transparent baffes correspond to at least the requirements set out in point 2.1.4 of Annex 2 to the Regulation.
CHAPTER XI
Transitional and final provisions
§ 330. [ Transitional provisions] The provisions of the Regulation shall not apply, subject to paragraph 2 (2). 1 and § 207 (1) 2 if, before the date of entry into force of the Regulation:
1) a request for a building permit or a separate application for approval of a construction project has been submitted and these applications have been drawn up on the basis of the existing regulations;
2) a declaration of construction or execution of works has been made in the case where it is not required to obtain a decision on the construction permit.
§ 331. [ Repealed provisions] The Regulation of the Minister of Spatial Management and Construction of 14 December 1994 is repealed. on the technical conditions to which the buildings should correspond and their location (Dz. U. of 1999 Nr 15, pos. 140, of late. zm.).
§ 332. [ Entry into force] The Regulation shall enter into force six months after the date of the announcement.
§ 332.
|
|
1) Currently, the government administration-construction, local planning and spatial planning and housing is headed by the Minister of Infrastructure and Development, pursuant to § 1 par. 2 point 1 of the Regulation of the Prime Minister of 22 September 2014 on the detailed scope of the Action of the Minister of Infrastructure and Development (Dz. U. Entry 1257).
Annex 1. [ LIST OF THE POLISH STANDARDS SET OUT IN THE REGULATION]
Annexes to the Regulation of the Minister of Infrastructure
of 12 April 2002
Annex No 1
LIST OF POLISH STANDARDS SET OUT IN THE REGULATION
| Seq. |
Place of establishment |
Standard number |
Title of the standard (appointment range) |
|
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
|
| 1 |
§ 53 par. 2 |
PN-EN 62305-1:2008 |
Refusing protection-Part 1: General principles |
|
| PN-EN 62305-2:2008 |
Refusing protection-Part 2: Risk Management |
|||
| 2 |
§ 96 ust. 1 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02170:1985 |
Assessment of the harmfulness of vibrations transmitted by the ground on buildings |
|||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|||
| 3 |
§ 98 ust. 2 |
PN-HD 308 S2:2007 |
Identification of veins in cables and conductors and in shellings |
|
| PN-IEC 364-4-481:1994 |
Electrical installations in building buildings-Security protection-Selection of protection measures according to external influence-Choice of anti-shock protection measures depending on external influences (in the scope of paragraph 481.3.1.1) |
|||
| PN-EN 12464-1:2004 |
Light and lighting-Lighting system-Part 1: Workplaces in the interiors |
|||
| PN-HD 60364-1:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 1: Basic requirements, general characteristics, definitions |
|||
| PN-HD 60364-4-41:2009 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 4-41: Protection for safety-Protection against electric shock |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-42:1999 |
Electrical installations in building facilities-Security for safety-Protection against thermal effects |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-43:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Protection against flow current |
|||
|
|
|
PN-IEC 60364-4-442:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Protection against surges-Protection of low-voltage installations against transient surges and damage to high-voltage supply systems |
|
| PN-IEC 60364-4-443:1999 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Safety for safety-Protection against surges-Protection against atmospheric or connecting surges |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-444:2001 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Protection against surges-Protection against electromagnetic interference (EMI) in building plant installations |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-45:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Protection against reduction of voltage |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-473:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Application of safety measures-Safety measures against current-current protection |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-482:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Selection of protection measures according to external influences-Fire protection |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-51:2000 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-General provisions |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-52:2002 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Oconduction |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-523:2001 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Current load capacity of conductors |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-53:2000 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Switchgear and control apparatus |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-534:2003 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Equipment for protection against surge protection |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-537:1999 |
Electrical installations in the construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Distribution and control apparatus-Insulating and connecting devices |
|||
| PN-HD 60364-5-54:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 5-54: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Grounding, protective hoses and protective wiring |
|||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-551:2003 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Other equipment-Low-voltage generating sets |
|||
| PN-HD 60364-5-559:2010 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Part 5-55: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Other equipment-Section 559: Lighting fittings and lighting systems |
|||
|
|
|
PN-IEC 60364-5-56:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Safety Installations |
|
| PN-HD 60364-6:2008 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 6: Checking |
|
||
| PN-EN 60445:2010 |
Basic and safety rules for human interaction with the machine, marking and identification-Identification of terminal equipment and termination of the wiring |
|
||
| PN-EN 60446:2010 |
Basic and safety rules for human interaction with the machine, marking and identification-Identification of conductors by colours or alphanumeric characters |
|
||
| 4 |
§ 113 ust. 4 |
PN-B-01706:1992 |
Plumbing Systems-Design Requirements (in the range of points 2.1; 2.3; 2.4.1; 2.4.3-2.4.5; 3.1.1-3.1.3; 3.1.5; 3.1.7; 3.2.2; 3.2.3; 3.3; 4.1; 4.2 and 4.4-4.6) |
|
| 5 |
§ 113 ust. 7 |
PN-EN 1717:2003 |
Protection against secondary water pollution in water installations and general requirements for devices to prevent pollution from the flow of return |
|
| 6 |
§ 115 par. 1 |
PN-B-10720:1998 |
Water pipelines-Superstructure of water meters in water systems-Requirements and tests at Receiving (in the scope of points 2.1; 2.3; 2.4 and 2.6) |
|
| 7 |
§ 116 par. 3 |
PN-HD 60364-5-54:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 5-54: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Grounding, protective hoses and protective wiring |
|
| 8 |
§ 120 (1) 4 |
PN-B-02440:1976 |
Protection of hot water devices-Requirements (in the scope of point 2; 3.1.1; 3.1.2 and 3.2.1-3.2.13) |
|
| 9 |
§ 121 par. 2 |
PN-B-10720:1998 |
Water pipelines-Superstructure of water meters in water systems-Requirements and tests at Receiving (in the scope of points 2.1; 2.3; 2.4 and 2.6) |
|
| 10 |
§ 122 par. 2 |
PN-EN 12056-1:2002 |
Gravitational drainage systems inside buildings-Part 1: General provisions and requirements (in the scope of paragraphs 4 and 5) |
|
| PN-EN 12056-2:2002 |
Gravitational Sewerage Systems inside buildings-Part 2: Sewerage-Design of the system and calculations (in the range of points 4 to 6) |
|
||
| PN-EN 12056-3:2002 |
Gravitational Sewerage Systems inside buildings-Part 3: Rainwater-Design of the system and calculations (in the range of points 4 to 7) |
|
||
|
|
|
PN-EN 12056-4:2002 |
Gravitational Sewerage Systems inside buildings-Part 4: Sewage pumps-System design and calculations (in the range of points 4 to 6) |
|
| PN-EN 12056-5:2002 |
Gravitational drainage systems inside buildings-Part 5: Assembly and test, operation, use and operation instructions (in the range of points 5-9) |
|
||
| PN-EN 12109:2003 |
Internal vacuum sewerage systems (in the range of points 5; 7 and 8) |
|
||
| 11 |
§ 124 |
PN-EN 12056-4:2002 |
Gravitational Sewerage Systems inside buildings-Part 4: Sewage pumps-System design and calculations (in the range of points 4 to 6) |
|
| PN-EN 13564-1:2004 |
Anti-overalley equipment in buildings-Part 1: Requirements |
|
||
| 12 |
§ 125 para. 4 |
PN-B-01707:1992 |
Sewerage installations-Requirements for design (in the scope of Section 4.2.2 except for the reference to point 3.5) |
|
| 13 |
§ 131 |
PN-B-94340:1991 |
Waste waste |
|
| 14 |
§ 133 ust. 3 |
PN-B-02413:1991 |
Heating and heating-Preservation of open-system water heaters-Requirements |
|
| PN-B-02414:1999 |
Heating and heating-Preservation of the installation of closed-system water heaters with remodelling vessels-Requirements |
|
||
| PN-B-02415:1991 |
Heating and heat engineering-Waterproofing of closed district heating systems-Requirements |
|
||
| PN-B-02416:1991 |
Heating and heating-Preservation of the installation of closed-system water heaters connected to the heat network-Requirements |
|
||
| 15 |
§ 133 ust. 4 |
PN-C-04607:1993 |
Water in the heating systems-Requirements and tests for water quality |
|
| 16 |
§ 134 (1) 1 |
PN-EN ISO 6946:2008 |
Building components and building components-Thermal resistance and heat transfer coefficient-Calculation method |
|
| PN-EN ISO 10077-1:2007 |
Thermal properties of windows, doors and blinds-Calculation of heat transfer coefficient-Part 1: General provisions |
|
||
| PN-EN ISO 10077-2:2005 |
Thermal properties of windows, doors and blinds-Calculation of heat transfer coefficient-Part 2: Computer method for frames |
|
||
| PN-EN ISO 10211:2008 |
Heat bridges in buildings-Heat loss and surface temperatures-Detailed calculations |
|
||
| PN-EN 12831:2006 |
Heating installations in buildings-Method of calculation of the design heat load |
|
||
|
|
|
PN-EN ISO 13370:2008 |
Thermal properties of buildings-Moving of heat through land-Calculation methods |
|
| PN-EN ISO 13789:2008 |
Thermal properties of buildings-Heat exchange interfactors by penetration and ventilation-Method of calculation |
|
||
| PN-EN ISO 14683:2008 |
Thermal bridges in buildings-Linear heat transfer coefficient-Simplified methods and guide values |
|
||
| 17 |
§ 134 (1) 2 |
PN-B-02403:1982 |
Heater-Temperatures external computational |
|
| 18 |
§ 135 par. 4 |
PN-B-02421:2000 |
Heating and heating-Thermal insulation of conductors, fixtures and appliances-Performance requirements and tests (in the scope of paragraphs 2.1; 2.2; 2.3.1; 2.4.1 to 2.4.4 and 2.5.1-2.5.6) |
|
| 19 |
§ 136 (1) 2 |
PN-B-02411:1987 |
Heater-Boiler built into solid fuel-Requirements (in the range of paragraphs 2.1.3-2.1.6 and 2.1.8-2.1.10) |
|
| 20 |
§ 136 (1) 2a |
PN-B-02411:1987 |
Heater-Boiler built into solid fuel-Requirements (in the range of points 2.1.3-2.1.5; 2.1.6.2 and 2.1.9-2.1.10) |
|
| 21 |
§ 136 (1) 3 |
PN-B-02411:1987 |
Heater-Boiler built into solid fuel-Requirements (in the scope of points 2.2.2-2.2.8 and 2.2.10-2.2.16) |
|
| 22 |
§ 137 ust. 9 |
PN-E-05204:1994 |
Protection against static electricity-Protecting objects, installations and devices-Requirements |
|
| 23 |
§ 140 ust. 1 |
PN-B-10425:1989 |
Bricks, combustion pipelines and ventilating bricks-Technical requirements and tests for reception |
|
| 24 |
§ 142 ust. 2 |
PN-B-10425:1989 |
Bricks, combustion pipelines and ventilating bricks-Technical requirements and tests for reception (in the range of paragraph 3.3.2) |
|
| 25 |
§ 143 par. 1 |
PN-B-02011:1977 PN-B-02011:1977/Az1:2009 |
Static calculation loads-Wind load (in the range of 3.3) |
|
| 26 |
§ 147 ust. 1 |
PN-B-03430:1983 PN-B-03430:1983/Az3:2000 |
Ventilation in residential buildings and public buildings-Requirements (except paragraphs 5.2.1 and 5.2.3) |
|
| 27 |
§ 147 ust. 3 |
PN-B-03421:1978 |
Ventilation and air conditioning-Computational parameters of internal air indoors intended for permanent residence of humans |
|
| 28 |
§ 149 (1) 1 |
PN-B-03430:1983 PN-B-03430:1983/Az3:2000 |
Ventilation in residential buildings and public housing-Requirements (in the scope of points 2.1.2 to 2.1.4; 3.1 and 4.1) |
|
| 29 |
§ 149 (1) 4 |
PN-B-03421:1978 |
Ventilation and air conditioning-Computational parameters of internal air indoors intended for permanent residence of humans |
|
| 30 |
§ 153 para. 2 |
PN-EN 1507:2007 |
Building ventilation-Rectangular Sheet of Rectangular Section-Strength and Leakage Requirements |
|
| PN-EN 12237:2005 |
Ventilation of buildings-Cable network-Strength and tightness of coils of circular cross sections |
|
||
| 31 |
§ 153 para. 5 |
PN-EN 12097:2007 |
Building ventilation-Cable network-Requirements for building elements of cable networks to facilitate the maintenance of the wiring networks |
|
| 32 |
§ 154 par. 6 |
PN-EN 779:2005 |
Anti-dust air filters for general ventilation-Determination of filtration parameters (in the scope of chapter 4) |
|
| 33 |
§ 155 ust. 4 |
PN-B-03430:1983 PN-B-03430:1983/Az3:2000 |
Ventilation in residential buildings and public buildings-Requirements (in the scope of point 2.1.5) |
|
| 34 |
§ 157 (a) 2 |
PN-C-04753:2002 |
Natural gas-The gas quality delivered to customers from the distribution network (in the scope of Chapter 2) |
|
| PN-C-96008:1998 |
Petroleum products-Hydrocarbon gases-Liquefied gases C3-C4 (in the range of Chapter 3) |
|
||
| 35 |
§ 163 ust. 1a |
PN-EN 1775:2009 |
Gas Supply-Gas flows for buildings-Maximum working pressure of 5 bar or less-Functional recommendations (in the scope of point 4.2) |
|
| 36 |
§ 163 ust. 2 |
PN-EN 10208-1:2000 |
Steel pipes for flammable media-Rury with requirement class A |
|
| 37 |
§ 163 ust. 4 |
PN-EN 1775:2009 |
Gas Supply-Gas flows for buildings-Maximum working pressure of 5 bar or less-Functional recommendations (in the scope of point 4.2) |
|
| 38 |
§ 166 ust. 1 |
PN-EN 1359:2004 |
Gas meters-Sword Gazomizer |
|
| 39 |
§ 170 par. 1 |
PN-B-03430:1983 PN-B-03430:1983/Az3:2000 |
Ventilation in residential buildings and public buildings-Requirements (except paragraphs 5.2.1 and 5.2.3) |
|
| 40 |
§ 176 par. 1 |
PN-B-02431-1:1999 |
Heater-Boiler built into gaseous fuels with a relative density of less than 1-Requirements (in the scope of paragraph 2.2 with the exception of 2.2.1.4; 2.2.1.8; 2.2.2.4 and 2.2.2.5 and paragraph 2.3 with the exception of 2.3.8.1; 2.3.8.2; 2.3.9 and 2.3.14) |
|
| 41 |
§ 180 |
PN-HD 308 S2:2007 |
Identification of veins in cables and conductors and in shellings |
|
| PN-IEC 364-4-481:1994 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Security protection-Selection of protection measures according to external influence-Choice of anti-shock protection measures depending on external influences (in the scope of paragraph 481.3.1.1) |
|
||
| PN-N-01256-02:1992 |
Safety Characters-Evacuation |
|
||
| PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|
||
| PN-E-05010:1991 |
Electrical installation of electrical installations in construction works |
|
||
| PN-E-05115:2002 |
Alternating current installations with a voltage greater than 1 kV |
|
||
| PN-E-08501:1988 |
Electrical equipment-Boards and safety marks |
|
||
| PN-EN 12464-1:2004 |
Light and lighting-Lighting system-Part 1: Workplaces in the interiors |
|
||
| PN-EN 50160:2002 PN-EN 50160 :2002/AC: 2004 PN-EN 50160 :2002/Apl: 2005 |
Supply voltage parameters in public distribution networks |
|
||
| PN-EN 50310:2007 |
Use of compensatory and grounding connections in buildings where IT equipment is installed |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-1:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 1: Basic requirements, general characteristics, definitions |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-4-41:2009 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 4-41: Protection for safety-Protection against electric shock |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-42:1999 |
Electrical installations in building facilities-Security for safety-Protection against thermal effects |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-43:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Protection against flow current |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-442:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Protection against surges-Protection of low-voltage installations against transient surges and damage to high-voltage supply systems |
|
||
|
|
|
PN-IEC 60364-4-443:1999 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Safety for safety-Protection against surges-Protection against atmospheric or connecting surges |
|
| PN-IEC 60364-4-444:2001 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Protection against surges-Protection against electromagnetic interference (EMI) in building plant installations |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-45:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Protection against reduction of voltage |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-473:1999 |
Electrical installations in buildings-Protection for safety-Application of safety measures-Safety measures against current-current protection |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-482:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Protection for safety-Selection of protection measures according to external influences-Fire protection |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-51:2000 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-General provisions |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-52:2002 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Oconduction |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-523:2001 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Current load capacity of conductors |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-53:2000 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Switchgear and control apparatus |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-534:2003 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Equipment for protection against surge protection |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-537:1999 |
Electrical installations in the construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Distribution and control apparatus-Insulating and connecting devices |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-5-54:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 5-54: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Grounding, protective hoses and protective wiring |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-551:2003 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Other equipment-Low-voltage generating sets |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-5-559:2010 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Part 5-55: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Other equipment-Section 559: Lighting fittings and lighting systems |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-56:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Safety Installations |
|
||
|
|
|
PN-HD 60364-6:2008 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 6: Checking |
|
| PN-HD 60364-7-701:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 7-701: Requirements for special installations or locations-Rooms equipped with a bath or shower |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-7-702:1999 PN-IEC 60364-7-702:1999/Apl: 2002 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Requirements for special installations or locations-Swimming pools and other |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-7-703:2007 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Part 7-703: Requirements for special installations or locations-Rooms and cabs containing sauna heaters |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-7-704:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 7-704: Requirements for special installations or locations-Building and demolition installations |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-7-705:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Requirements for special installations or localities-Electrical installations in agricultural and horticultural farms |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-7-706:2000 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Requirements for special installations or localisation-Spaces of limited conductive surfaces |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-7-714:2003 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Requirements for special installations or locations-External lighting installations |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-7-715:2006 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Part 7-715: Requirements for special installations or localities-Very low voltage lighting systems |
|
||
| PN-HD 60364-7-740:2009 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Part 7-740: Requirements for special installations or localisation-Temporary electrical installations of objects, amusement facilities and stalls at the fair, merry towns and circuses |
|
||
| PN-EN 60445:2010 |
Basic and safety rules for human interaction with the machine, marking and identification-Identification of terminal equipment and termination of the wiring |
|
||
| PN-EN 60446:2010 |
Basic and safety rules for human interaction with the machine, marking and identification-Identification of conductors by colours or alphanumeric characters |
|
||
| PN-EN 60529:2003 |
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) |
|
||
| PN-EN 61140:2005 PN-EN 61140 :2005/Al: 2008 |
Protection against electric shock-Common aspects of installation and equipment |
|
||
| PN-EN 61293:2000 |
Electrical equipment marking of electrical power rating data-Safety requirements |
|
||
| 42 |
§ 181 par. 7 |
PN-EN 1838:2005 |
Lighting Applications-Emergency Lighting |
|
| PN-EN 50172:2005 |
Emergency evacuation lighting systems |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-5-56:1999 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Safety Installations |
|
||
| 43 |
§ 184 para. 2 |
PN-HD 60364-5-54:2010 |
Low-voltage electrical installations-Part 5-54: Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Grounding, protective hoses and protective wiring |
|
| 44 |
§ 184 para. 3 |
PN-EN 62305-1:2008 |
Refusing protection-Part 1: General principles |
|
| PN-EN 62305-2:2008 |
Refusing protection-Part 2: Risk Management |
|
||
| PN-EN 62305-3:2009 |
Gravitation protection-Part 3: Physical damage to objects and life threat |
|
||
| PN-EN 62305-4:2009 |
Unrest protection-Part 4: Electrical and electronic equipment in facilities |
|
||
| PN-IEC 60364-4-443:1999 |
Electrical installations for construction works-Safety for safety-Protection against surges-Protection against atmospheric or connecting surges |
|
||
| 45 |
§ 186 para. 2 |
PN-IEC 60364-5-52:2002 |
Electrical installations in construction works-Selection and assembly of electrical equipment-Oconduction |
|
| 46 |
§ 187 (1) 3 |
PN-EN 1363-1:2001 |
Fire resistance tests-Part 1: General requirements |
|
| 47 |
§ 187 (1) 5 |
PN-EN 50200:2003 |
Method of testing the flammability of thin wires and cables without special protection applied in the protection circuits |
|
| 47a |
§ 192b |
PN-EN 50174-2:2010 |
Information Technology-Cabling Installations-Part 2: Planning and installation of indoor installations |
|
| 48 |
§ 196 par. 2 and 3 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|
||
| 49 |
§ 204 par. 4 |
PN-B-02000:1982 |
Building loads-Principles for determining values |
|
| PN-B-02001:1982 |
Building Loads-Fixed Loads |
|
||
| PN-B-02003:1982 |
Building loads-Technology variable loads-Basic technological and assembly loads |
|
||
| PN-B-02004:1982 |
Building Loads-Technological Variable Loads-Vehicle Loads |
|
||
|
|
|
PN-B-02005:1986 |
Building loads-Staging overhead cranes, hoists and hoists |
|
| PN-B-02010:1980 PN-B-02010:1980/Az1:2006 |
Loads in the static calculations-Snow load |
|||
| PN-B-02011:1977 PN-B-02011:1977/Az1:2009 |
Static calculations workloads-Wind load |
|||
| PN-B-02013:1987 |
Building Load-Environment Variables-Ice Load |
|||
| PN-B-02014:1988 |
Building loads-Land load |
|||
| PN-B-02015:1986 |
Building Loads-Environment Variable Loads-Temperature Load |
|||
| PN-B-03001:1976 |
Structures and construction substrates-General principles of calculation |
|||
| PN-B-03002:2007 |
Masonry constructions-Design and calculation |
|||
| PN-B-03020:1981 |
Building land-Direct building construction-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03150:2000 PN-B-03150:2000/Az1:2001 PN-B-03150:2000/Az2:2003 PN-B-03150:2000/Az3:2004 |
Wooden constructions-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03200:1990 |
Steel Structures-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03215:1998 |
Steel constructions-Foundation connections-Design and execution |
|||
| PN-B-03230:1984 |
Lightweight curtain walls and roof coverings made of laminated and ribbed panels-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03263:2000 |
Concrete, reinforced concrete and compressed structures made of concrete lightweight concrete-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03264:2002 PN-B-03264:2002/Ap1:2004 |
Concrete constructions, reinforced concrete and compressed-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-B-03300:2006 PN-B-03300:2006/Ap1:2008 |
Steel-concrete constructions-Static calculations and design |
|||
| PN-EN 1990 * ) : PN-EN 1991 * ) : |
Eurocode: Fundamentals of design Eurocode 1: Impact on constructions |
|||
| PN-EN 1992 * ) : PN-EN 1993 * ) : PN-EN 1994 * ) : PN-EN 1995 * ) : PN-EN 1996 * ) : PN-EN 1997 * ) : PN-EN 1999 * ) : |
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Eurocode 4: Design of steel-concrete structures Eurocode 5: Design of wooden structures Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures (all parts of the standards) |
|||
| 50 |
§ 208 § 208a |
PN-EN 81-58:2005 |
Safety provisions for the construction and installation of cranes-Tests and tests-Part 58: Test of resistance to fire stop door |
|
| PN-EN 1021-1:2007 |
Furniture-Assessment of the smell of upholstered furniture-Part 1: ignition source: the cigarette is curved |
|||
| PN-EN 1021-2:2007 |
Furniture-Assessment of the smell of upholstered furniture-Part 2: ignition source: equivalent flame of the matchmaking |
|||
| PN-EN 1991-1-2:2006 PN-EN 1991-1-2:2006/AC: 2009 |
Eurocode 1: Impact on constructions-Part 1-2: General impact-Impact on constructions in fire conditions |
|||
| PN-B-02852:2001 |
Fire protection of buildings-Calculation of fire load density and relative determinations the duration of the fire (in respect of fire density part-paragraph 2) |
|||
| PN-B-02855:1988 |
Fire protection of buildings-Test method for the secretion of toxic products of decomposition and combustion of materials |
|||
| PN-B-02867:1990 |
Fire protection of buildings-Method of testing the degree of fire spreading through the walls (in the area of external walls with fire from the side of the façade) |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 6940: 2005 |
Textile products-Smoking behaviour-Determination of the flammability of the vertically placed samples |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 6941: 2005 |
Textile products-Smoking behaviour-Measurement of the properties of the flame spread on the vertically placed samples |
|||
| PN-EN 13501-1 + A1: 2010 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 1: Classification based on reaction tests on fire |
|||
| PN-EN 13501-2 + A1: 2010 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 2: Classification by fire-resistance test (excluding ventilation) |
|||
| PN-EN 13501-3 + A1: 2010 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 3: Classification based on fire resistance tests of products and components used in utility installations in buildings: fire-retardant ventilation ducts and fire fighting flaps |
|||
| PN-EN 13501-4 + A1: 2010 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 4: Classification on the basis of the results of fire resistance of elements of smoke control systems |
|||
| PN-EN 13501-5 + A1: 2010 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 5: Classification based on the results of external fire impact tests on roofs |
|||
| 51 |
§ 253 para. 1 |
PN-EN 81-72:2005 |
Safety regulations for the construction and installation of cranes-Particular applications for passenger and cargo lifts-Part 72: Cranes for fire brigade |
|
| 52 |
§ 258 ust. 1a |
PN-EN ISO 6940:2005 |
Textile products-Smoking behaviour-Determination of the flammability of the vertically placed samples |
|
| PN-EN ISO 6941:2005 |
Textile products-Smoking behaviour-Measurement of the properties of the flame spread on the vertically placed samples |
|||
| 53 |
§ 261 point 1 |
PN-EN 1021-2:2007 |
Furniture-Assessment of the smell of upholstered furniture-Part 2: ignition source: equivalent flame of the matchmaking |
|
| PN-EN 1021-1:2007 |
Furniture-Assessment of the smell of upholstered furniture-Part 1: ignition source: the cigarette is curved |
|||
| PN-B-02855:1988 |
Fire protection of buildings-Test method for the secretion of toxic products of decomposition and combustion of materials |
|||
| 54 |
§ 266 par. 2 |
PN-B-02870:1993 |
Fire tests-Small chimneys-Research at elevated temperatures |
|
| 55 |
§ 287 (4) |
PN-N-01256-02:1992 |
Safety Characters-Evacuation |
|
| PN-N-01256-5:1998 |
Safety marks-Rules for the placement of safety signs on evacuation roads and fire roads |
|||
| PN-ISO 7010:2006 |
Graphic symbols-Safety Bars and Safety Marks-Safety Signs used in workplaces and in public utility areas |
|||
| 56 |
§ 287 (6) |
See: Polish Norms set up in § 180 |
||
| 57 |
§ 288 pt. 5 |
PN-N-01256-02:1992 |
Safety Characters-Evacuation |
|
| PN-N-01256-5:1998 |
Safety marks-Rules for the placement of safety signs on evacuation roads and fire roads |
|||
| PN-ISO 7010:2006 |
Graphic symbols-Safety Bars and Safety Marks-Safety Signs used in workplaces and in public utility areas |
|||
| 58 |
§ 288 point 7 |
See: Polish Norms set up in § 180 |
||
| 59 |
§ 298 para. 1 |
PN-B-02003:1982 |
Building loads-Technology variable loads-Basic technological and assembly loads (in the scope of point 3.6) |
|
| 60 |
§ 305 ust. 2 |
PN-E-05204:1994 |
Protection against static electricity-Protecting objects, installations and devices-Requirements |
|
| 61 |
§ 324 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02170:1985 |
Assessment of the harmfulness of vibrations transmitted by the ground on buildings |
|||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|||
| 62 |
§ 325 ust. 1 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02170:1985 |
Assessment of the harmfulness of vibrations transmitted by the ground on buildings |
|||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|||
| 63 |
§ 325 ust. 2 |
PN-B-02151-3:1999 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise in buildings-Acoustic insulation in buildings and acoustic insulation of building elements-Requirements (in the scope of points 1, 2, 6, 8 and 9.) |
|
| 64 |
§ 326 (1) 1 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02156:1987 |
Building acoustics-Sound measurement methods A in buildings |
|||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|||
| 65 |
§ 326 (1) 2 |
PN-EN ISO 140-4:2000 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and acoustic insulation of building elements-Measurements of off-road insulating from air sounds between rooms |
|
| PN-EN ISO 140-5:1999 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Field measurements of acoustic insulation from the air sounds of the external wall and its elements |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 140-6:1999 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Laboratory measurements of insulation from impact sounds of strops |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 140-7:2000 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Field measurements of insulation from sound impact of strops |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 140-8:1999 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and acoustic insulation of building elements-Laboratory measurements attenuation of impact sounds by flooring on a massive reference ceiling |
|||
| PN-EN ISO 140-12:2001 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Part 12: Laboratory measurement of insulation from air sounds and impact of raised floor between two neighboring rooms |
|||
| PN-EN 20140-3:1999 PN-EN 20140-3:1999/A1:2007 |
Acoustics-Measurement of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Laboratory measurements of insulation from the air sounds of building elements |
|||
| PN-EN 20140-9:1998 |
Acoustics-Measurements of acoustic insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Laboratory measurement of insulation from air sounds, for suspended ceilings with ceiling space, measured between two neighboring rooms |
|||
| PN-EN 20140-10:1994 |
Acoustics-Measurements of sound insulation in buildings and sound insulation of building elements-Laboratory measurements of insulation from the air sounds of small building elements |
|||
| 66 |
§ 326 (1) 3 |
PN-B-02151-3:1999 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise in buildings-Acoustic insulation in buildings and acoustical insulation of building elements-Requirements (in the range of paragraphs 1 to 5; 7 and 9.) |
|
| 67 |
§ 326 (1) 4 |
PN-B-02151-02:1987 |
Acoustics-Protection against noise of premises in buildings-Limits of sound level in rooms |
|
| PN-B-02156:1987 |
Building acoustics-Sound measurement methods A in buildings |
|||
| PN-B-02171:1988 |
Assessment of the impact of vibrations on people in buildings |
|||
| 68 |
§ 326 (1) 5 |
PN-EN ISO 354:2005 |
Acoustics-Measurement of sound absorption in a heart-like chamber |
|
| 69 |
Annex No 2, points 1.1. and 1.4. |
PN-EN ISO 6946:2008 |
Building components and building components-Thermal resistance and heat transfer coefficient-Calculation method |
|
| PN-EN ISO 13370:2008 |
Thermal properties of buildings-Moving of heat through land-Calculation methods |
|||
| 70 |
Annex No 2, point 2.2.1., 2.2.2., 2.2.3. Paragraph 1 and paragraph 2.2.4. |
PN-EN ISO 13788:2003 |
Thermal and humid properties of building components and building elements-Temperature of internal surface necessary to avoid critical surface humidity and interlayer condensation-Calculation methods |
|
| 71 |
Annex No 2, point 2.2.3. Point 2 |
PN-EN ISO 10211:2008 |
Heat bridges in buildings-Heat loss and surface temperatures-Detailed calculations |
|
| 72 |
Annex No 2, point 2.3.2. |
PN-EN 12207:2001 |
Windows And Doors-Air Solubility-Classification |
|
| 73 |
Annex No 2, point 2.3.4. |
PN-EN 13829:2002 |
Thermal properties of buildings-Determination of air permeability of buildings-Method of pressure measurement with fan |
|
| 74 |
Annex No 3 |
PN-ENV 1187:2004 PN-ENV 1187:2004/A1:2007 |
Methods of external fire impact tests on roofs |
|
| PN-EN 13501-1:2008 |
Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 1: Classification based on reaction tests on fire |
|||
| *) -Polish design standards introducing European design standards-Eurocodes, approved and published in Polish, can be used for design design, if they cover all necessary aspects related to design of this construction (constitute a complete set of standards enabling design). The design of each type of construction requires the use of PN-EN 1990 and PN-EN 1991. |
||||
Annex 2. [ REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL INSULATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS FOR ENERGY SAVING]
Annex No 2
REQUIREMENTS FOR THERMAL INSULATION AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS RELATED TO ENERGY SAVING
1. Thermal insulation of partitions
1.1. Values of the heat transfer coefficient UC of walls, roofs, ceilings and ceilings for all types of buildings, taking into account the amendments due to air vacuum in the insulation layer, mechanical fittings passing through the insulating layer and inverted layer rainfall, calculated according to the Polish Standards for the calculation of heat resistance and heat transfer coefficient and heat transfer by the ground, shall not be greater than the UC (max) values specified in following table:
| Seq. |
Type of bulkhead and room temperature |
UC Heat penetration factor (max) |
||
| From 1 January 2014 |
From 1 January 2017 |
1 January 2021 *) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
||
| 1 |
External walls: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
0.25 |
0.23 |
0.20 |
|
| (b) at 8 ° C ≤ ti < 16 ° C |
0.45 |
0.45 |
0.45 |
|
| (c) at ti < 8 ° C |
0.90 |
0.90 |
0.90 |
|
| 2 |
Internal Walls: |
|
|
|
| (a) at Δti ≥ 8 ° C and separating rooms heated from stairways and corridors |
1.00 |
1.00 |
1.00 |
|
| (b) at Δti < 8 ° C |
no requirements |
no requirements |
no requirements |
|
| (c) separating the heated room from the non-heated |
0.30 |
0.30 |
0.30 |
|
| 3 |
The walls are adjacent to the dilating slots of the width: |
|
|
|
| a) up to 5 cm, permanently closed and filled with heat insulation at a depth of at least 20 cm |
1.00 |
1.00 |
1.00 |
|
| (b) greater than 5 cm, irrespective of the manner in which the seal is closed and sealed. |
0.70 |
0.70 |
0.70 |
|
| 4 |
Walls of unheated underground storeys |
no requirements |
no requirements |
no requirements |
| 5 |
Roofs, stropods and ceilings under unheated attic or over crossings: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
0.20 |
0.18 |
0.15 |
|
| (b) at 8 ° C ≤ ti < 16 ° C |
0.30 |
0.30 |
0.30 |
|
| (c) at ti < 8 ° C |
0.70 |
0.70 |
0.70 |
|
| 6 |
Ground floor: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
0.30 |
0.30 |
0.30 |
|
| (b) at 8 ° C ≤ ti < 16 ° C |
1.20 |
1.20 |
1.20 |
|
| (c) at ti < 8 ° C |
1.50 |
1.50 |
1.50 |
|
| 7 |
Ceilings over rooms with unheated and closed underfloor spaces: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
0.25 |
0.25 |
0.25 |
|
| (b) at 8 ° C ≤ ti < 16 ° C |
0.30 |
0.30 |
0.30 |
|
| (c) at ti < 8 ° C |
1.00 |
1.00 |
1.00 |
|
|
|
Ceilings over heated underground spaces and inter-storey ceilings: |
|
|
|
| 8 |
(a) at Δti ≥ 8 ° C |
1.00 |
1.00 |
1.00 |
| (b) at Δti < 8 ° C |
no requirements |
no requirements |
no requirements |
|
| (c) separating the heated room from the non-heated |
0.25 |
0.25 |
0.25 |
|
| Heated room-a room where the temperature is maintained as a result of the operation of the heating system or as a result of the balance of losses and heat gains, the value of which is defined in § 134 (1). 2 of the Regulation. ti-The temperature of the heated room according to § 134 (1). 2 of the Regulation. *) From 1 January 2019 -in the case of buildings occupied by public authorities and owned by public authorities. |
||||
1.2. The values of the heat transfer coefficient U windows, balcony doors and external doors shall not be greater than the U (max) values specified in the following table:
| Seq. |
Windows, balcony doors and external doors |
Thermal penetration rate U (max) |
||
| From 1 January 2014 |
From 1 January 2017 |
1 January 2021 *) |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
||
| 1 |
Windows (except for Latin windows), balcony doors and transparent surfaces with non-opening: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
1.3 |
1.1 |
0.9 |
|
| (b) at ti < 16 ° C |
1.8 |
1.6 |
1.4 |
|
| 2 |
Window-wise windows: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ti ≥ 16 ° C |
1.5 |
1.3 |
1.1 |
|
| (b) at ti < 16 ° C |
1.8 |
1.6 |
1.4 |
|
| 3 |
Windows in internal walls: |
|
|
|
| (a) at ∆ti ≥ 8 ° C |
1.5 |
1.3 |
1.1 |
|
| (b) at ∆ti < 8 ° C |
no requirements |
no requirements |
no requirements |
|
| (c) separating the heated room from the non-heated |
1.5 |
1.3 |
1.1 |
|
| 4 |
Doors in external bulkhouses or in partitions between heated and unheated rooms |
1.7 |
1.5 |
1.3 |
| 5 |
Windows and external doors in outer bulkhouses of unheated spaces |
no requirements |
no requirements |
no requirements |
| Heated room-a room where the temperature is maintained as a result of the operation of the heating system or as a result of the balance of losses and heat gains, the value of which is defined in § 134 (1). 2 of the Regulation. ti-The temperature of the heated room according to § 134 (1). 2 of the Regulation. * ) From 1 January 2019 -in the case of buildings occupied by public authorities and owned by public authorities. |
||||
1.3. For the production, storage and economic building, higher values of U than UC (max) and U (max) as defined in paragraphs 1.1 and 1.2 shall be allowed if this is justified by the economic efficiency account of the investment, including construction costs and operation of the building
1.4. In a residential building, collective residence, public utility, production, storage and economic floor, the floor on the ground in a heated room should have a peripheral thermal insulation of the insulating material in the form of a layer of resistance. heat of at least 2,0 (m 2 -(K) In, where the thermal resistance of the floor coverings is calculated according to the Polish Standards referred to in point 1.1.
1.5. Thermal insulation of switchgear and components in central heating, hot water (including circulators), refrigeration and air heating systems shall meet the following minimum requirements in the table below:
| Seq. |
Type of cable or component |
Minimum thickness of thermal insulation (material with a coefficient Heat conductivity λ = 0 ,035 [ W/ (m-K)] 1) ) |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| 1 |
Inner diameter up to 22 mm |
20 mm |
| 2 |
Inner diameter from 22 to 35 mm |
30 mm |
| 3 |
Inner diameter from 35 to 100 mm |
equal to the inner tube diameter |
| 4 |
Inner diameter over 100 mm |
100 mm |
| 5 |
Tubing and fittings according to lp 1-4 passing through walls or ceilings, crossover wires |
50% of the requirements from lp. 1-4 |
| 6 |
Conductors of central heating, hot water pipes and circulating hot water installations according to lp 1-4, arranged in construction components between heated rooms of different users |
50% of the requirements from lp. 1-4 |
| 7 |
Cables by lp. 6 stacked in the floor |
6 mm |
| 8 |
Air heating pipes (arranged in part of a heated building) |
40 mm |
| 9 |
Air heating pipes (arranged in part of an unheated building) |
80 mm |
| 10 |
Inside-building Ice-Water Installation Piping 2) |
50% of the requirements from lp. 1-4 |
| 11 |
Outside-Building Ice-Water Installation Piping 2) |
100% of the requirements of lp. 1-4 |
| Note: 1) When using insulating material with a different heat conductivity than given in the table, the thickness of the insulating layer shall be corrected. 2) Heat insulation made as air-proof. |
||
2. Other requirements for energy saving
2.1. Windows
2.1.1. In the residential building and residence of the collective area of the A0, expressed in m 2 , windows and glass partitions with a heat transfer coefficient of not less than 0,9 W/ (m) 2 -(K), calculated according to their modular dimensions, shall not be greater than the A0max value calculated according to the formula:
A0max = 0,15-Az + 0,03-Aw
where:
Az-is the sum of the area of the horizontal projection of all the floors of the filaments (in the outer oblection of the building) in the 5 m wide belt along the external walls,
Aw-is the sum of the space fields of the rest of the horizontal projection of all floors after Az has been subtracted.
2.1.2. In the public building the area of the A0 area, expressed in m 2 , windows and glass partitions with a heat transfer coefficient of not less than 0,9 W/ (m) 2 -(K), calculated according to their modular dimensions, shall not be greater than the A0max value calculated in accordance with the formula set out in point 2.1.1., if this is not contrary to the conditions for providing the necessary lighting for daylight, defined in § 57 of the Regulation.
2.1.3. In the production, storage and economic building, the total area of the window and of glass walls in relation to the surface of the entire façade shall not be greater than:
1) in the single-storey building (halal)-15%;
2) in the multi-storey building-30%.
2.1.4. In all types of buildings, the coefficient of permeability of total solar radiation of windows and of glass partitions and transparent glasks, calculated according to the formula:
g = fC-gn
where:
gn-the coefficient of total solar radiation energy permeability for the type of glazing,
fC-the coefficient of reduction of radiation due to the applied sun devices, during the summer period must not be greater than 0,35.
2.1.5. The values of the total solar radiation energy permeability factor for the type of glazing gn shall be taken on the basis of the declaration of performance of the window. If there is no data, the gn value is set by the following table:
| Seq. |
Glazing type |
The coefficient of the total transmission of solar radiation energy gn |
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
| 1 |
Single-glass |
0.85 |
| 2 |
Double glass |
0.75 |
| 3 |
Double-glass with selective coating |
0.67 |
| 4 |
Triple glass |
0.7 |
| 5 |
Triangular glass with selective coating |
0.5 |
| 6 |
Double windows |
0.75 |
2.1.6. The values of the radiation reduction coefficient due to the fC sunscreen used are determined by the following table:
| Seq. |
Curtain Type |
Optical properties |
FC reduction coefficient |
||
| absorption coefficient |
permeability factor |
internal shielding |
External shield |
||
| 1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
| 1 |
White blinds with arable lamellar |
0.1 |
0.05 0.1 0.3 |
0.25 0.30 0.45 |
0.10 0.15 0.35 |
| 2 |
White curtains |
0.1 |
0.5 0.7 0.9 |
0.65 0.80 0.95 |
0.55 0.75 0.95 |
| 3 |
Colorful curtains |
0.3 |
0.1 0.3 0.5 |
0.42 0.57 0.77 |
0.17 0.37 0.57 |
| 4 |
Curtains with aluminium coating |
0.2 |
0.05 |
0.20 |
0.08 |
2.1.7. Paragraph 2.1.4. shall not apply in relation to vertical surfaces and surface inclined more than 60 degrees to the level, directed in directions from the north-west to the north-eastern direction (direction north +/-45 degrees), protected windows before solar radiation shading, meeting the requirements referred to in point 2.1.4 and for windows with a surface area of less than 0,5 m 2 .
2.2. Conditions for the fulfilment of the water vapour condensation requirements
2.2.1. In order to preserve the condition referred to in § 321 (1) 1 of the Regulation, with regard to the divisions of external housing, collective residence, public utility, production, warehousing and economic solutions of external partitions and their construction nodes should be characterized by a temperature ratio of the fRsi with a value of not less than the required critical value, calculated according to the Polish Norm concerning the method of calculating the temperature of the internal surface necessary to avoid critical the moisture content of the surface and the interlayer condensation.
2.2.2. The required critical value of the temperature coefficient of fRsi in rooms heated to at least 20 °C in residential buildings, collective residence and public utility buildings should be determined according to Chapter 5 of the Polish Norms, o In paragraph 2.2.1., provided that the average monthly average moisture content of the internal air is equal to φ = 50 per cent, the required value of 0,72 is permitted to be used.
2.2.3. The value of the temperature coefficient characterizing the applied design and materials solution shall be calculated:
1. for baffes-according to the Polish Standard referred to in point 2.2.1.;
2) for heat bridges using the spatial baffle model-according to the Polish Standards for the calculation of heat streams and surface temperature.
2.2.4. Verification of the condition referred to in § 321 par. 1 and 2 of the Regulation, shall be carried out in accordance with Chapel 5 and 6 of the Polish Standard referred to in point 2.2.1.
2.2.5. Condensation of water vapour as referred to in § 321 (1) is allowed. 2 of the Regulation, inside the baffle during the winter period, provided that the structure of the partitions allows the condensation of the condensate during the summer period and there shall be no degradation of the building materials of the bulkhead as a result of this condensation.
2.3. Leakage on air penetration
2.3.1. In the residential building, collective residence, public utility and the production of non-transparent external partitions, connectors between partitions and parts of partitions (inter alia, the combination of ceilings or roofs with external walls), the passage of installation elements (such as ventilation and internal combustion channels by external partitions) and the combination of windows with frames shall be designed and carried out in order to achieve their total leakage of air penetration.
2.3.2. In low-, medium-size buildings and high air permeability for windows and balcony doors at a pressure of 100 Pa is not more than 2,25 m 3 /(m-h) with respect to the length of the contact line or 9 m 3 /(m 2 -(h) in relation to the area of the surface, which corresponds to class 3 of the Polish Standard for window and door air permeability. For windows and balcony doors in high-altitude buildings, air permeability at a pressure of 100 Pa shall be not more than 0,75 m 3 /(m-h) with respect to the length of the contact line or 3 m 3 /(m 2 -(h) in relation to the area of the surface, which corresponds to class 4 of the Polish Standard for window and door air permeability.
2.3.3. The recommended air tightness of buildings shall be:
1) in buildings with gravitational ventilation or hybrid ventilation-n50 < 3,0 l/h;
2) in buildings with mechanical ventilation or air conditioning-n50 < 1,5 l/h.
2.3.4. It is recommended that after the completion of the construction of a residential building, collective residence, public service and manufacturing, a leakage test carried out in accordance with the Polish Norm for the determination of air permeability has been carried out. buildings in order to obtain the recommended tightness of the buildings as defined in paragraph 2.3.3.
Annex 3. [ APPLICABLE IN THE REGULATION CONCERNING THE FLAMMABILITY AND SPREAD OF FIRE AND THE CORRESPONDING EUROPEAN CLASSES OF REACTION TO FIRE AND THE CLASS OF RESISTANCE OF ROOFS TO EXTERNAL FIRE]
Annex No 3
DETERMINING THE FLAMMABILITY AND SPREAD OF FIRE IN THE REGULATION AND THE CORRESPONDING EUROPEAN CLASSES OF REACTION TO FIRE AND THE CLASS OF EXTERNAL FIRE PERFORMANCE OF ROOFS
1. The tability of construction products (materials)
1.1. The terms used in the Regulation: non-combustible, non-inflammatory, difficult-inflammatory, easily inflammatory, non-dripping, self-extinction, intensely dissipated (excluding floor coverings-including floor coverings) correspond to the class of reaction to fire, according to the Polish Standard PN-EN 13501-1:2008 ' Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 1: Classification based on reaction tests on fire ', as indicated in column 2 of Table 1.
Table 1
| Determination of the flammability used in the Regulation |
Classes of reaction to fire in accordance with PN-EN 13501-1:2008 |
|
| Non-combustible |
A1; A2-s1, d0; A2-s2, d0; A2-s3, d0; |
|
| Combustible |
non-inflammable |
A2-s1, d1; A2-s2, d1; A2-s3, d1; A2-s1, d2; A2-s2, d2; A2-s3, d2; B-s1, d0; B-s2, d0; B-s3, d0; B-s1, d1; B-s2, d1; B-s3, d1; B-s1, d2; B-s2, d2; B-s3, d2; |
| not inflamed |
C-s1, d0; C-s2, d0; C-s3, d0; C-s1, d1; C-s2, d1; C-s3, d1; C-s1, d2; C-s2, d2; C-s3, d2; D-s1, d0; D-s1, d1; D-s1, d2; |
|
| easily inflamed |
D-s2, d0; D-s3, d0; D-s2, d1; D-s3, d1; D-s2, d2; D-s3, d2; E-d2; E; F |
|
| Not Capable |
A1; A2-s1, d0; A2-s2, d0; A2-s3, d0; B-s1, d0; B-s2, d0; B-s3, d0; C-s1, d0; C-s2, d0; C-s3, d0; D-s1, d0; D-s2, d0; D-s3, d0; |
|
| Self-shrinking |
at least E |
|
| Extensively dissipated |
A2-s3, d0; A2-s3, d1; A2-s3, d2; B-s3, d0; B-s3, d1; B-s3, d2; C-s3, d0; C-s3, d1; C-s3, d2; D-s3, d0; D-s3, d1; D-s3, d2; E-d2; E; F |
|
1.2. The terms used in the regulation: non-combustible, non-inflammable, difficult-inflammatory, intensely dissipated with the floor coverings (including floor coverings) correspond to the class of reaction to fire, according to the Polish Standard PN-EN 13501-1:2008 " Fire classification of construction products and building elements-Part 1: Classification based on reaction tests on fire ', as indicated in column 2 of Table 2.
Table 2
| Determination of the flammability used in the Regulation |
Classes of reaction to fire according to |
| Non-combustible |
A1fl; A2 fl -s1; A2 fl -s2 |
| Not inflamed |
Bfl -s1; Bfl -s2; Cfl -s1; Cfl -s2 |
| Easily inflammable |
Dfl -s1; Dfl -s2; Efl; F fl |
| Extensively dissipated |
A2fl -s2; Bfl -s2; Cfl -s2; Dfl -s2; Efl; Ffl |
Note: The terms of paragraphs 1.1. and 1.2. also refer to construction products (materials) considered to meet the requirements for reaction to fire, without the need for research, the lists of which are contained in the decisions of the European Commission. published in the Official Journal of the European Union.
2. Fire spreading by elements of the building excluding external walls with fire action from outside the building
2.1. The non-proliferation of fire elements shall correspond to the following elements:
-fire reaction class products: A1; A2-s1, d0 A2-s2, d0; A2-s3, d0; B-s1, d0; Bs-2, d0; and Bs-3, d0;
-constituting a reaction-to-fire class: A1; A2-s1, d0; A2-s2, d0; A2-s3, d0; B-s1,d0; B-s2, d0 and B-s3, d0; and the insulating layer of stratified elements shall have a reaction class of at least E fire;
2.2. The poorly spreading fire elements of the building correspond to the elements:
-fire reaction class of products: C-s1, d0; C-s2, d0; C-s3, d0 and D-s1, d0;
-constituting a reaction-to-fire class: C-s1, d0; C-s2, d0; C-s3, d0 and D-s1, d0, where the insulating layer of stratified elements should have a reaction class of at least E.
3. Fire spreading through the wiring and thermal insulation of the installation wires used inside the building
The non-proliferation of fire, water supply, sewage and heating cables and their thermal insulation shall be as follows:
-hoses and insulations made of reaction-to-fire class products: A1L; A2L-s1, d0; A2L-s2, d0; A2L-s3, d0; BL-s1, d0; BL-s2, d0 and BL-s3, d0;
-pipes and insulations constituting a reaction-to-fire class according to PN-EN 13501-1:2008: A1L; A2L-s1, d0; A2L-s2, d0; A2L-s3, d0; BL-s1, d0; BL-s2, d0 and BL-s3, d0; the insulating layer of stratified elements shall have a reaction class on fire. Least E.
4. Fire Spread by Roofing Roof
4.1. The non-flaming fire of roofs shall be covered by:
1) the BROOF class (t1) studied according to the Polish Standard PN-ENV 1187:2004 "Methods of external fire impact test" ; Study 1.
2. BROOF class, recognised as meeting the requirements for the resistance of products to external fire, without the need for testing, the lists of which are contained in the decisions of the European Commission published in the Official Journal of the Union European.
The conditions and technical criteria for the disgusts of BROOF (t1) classes referred to in point 1 are given in Table 3.
Table 3
| Boost Groups |
Conditions and criteria for the BROOF class (t1) (Must be met all listed below) |
| Group a |
the extent of the destruction (outside and inside the roof) up to the roof of the roof < 0,70 m |
| the extent of the destruction (outside and inside the roof) down the roof < 0,60 m |
|
| maximum extent of combustion by combustion (outside and inside the roof) < 0,80 m |
|
| surface area spread fire |
no smoking material (droplines or solid waste) falling from exposed side |
| lateral reach of the fire does not reach the edge of the measured zone (belt) |
|
| maximum range (radius) of destruction on flat roofs (outside and inside the roof) < 0,20 m |
|
| Group b
|
no burning or burning particles penetrating the roof structure |
| no single floping openings with a surface > 25 mm 2 |
|
| penetration of fire inside the building |
sum of the total area of all the openings < 4500 mm 2 |
| no internal combustion in the form of a light |
4.2. Roofs which meet the criteria of group b and which do not comply with one or more of the criteria of the group and are classified as poorly spreading fire.
4.3. Roofing of the FROOF class (t1) shall be classified as a cover of highly dispersive fire.
[ 1] Repealed by Art. 43 point 2 (a) b of the Act of 29 August 2014. o the energy performance of buildings (Dz. U. Entry 1200), which entered into force 9 March 2015.
